1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
629 \begin_layout Itemize
631 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
643 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
659 \begin_layout Itemize
661 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
669 \begin_layout Itemize
691 \begin_layout Itemize
703 arg "buffer-write-as"
707 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
711 \begin_layout Itemize
713 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
729 \begin_layout Itemize
743 \begin_layout Itemize
757 \begin_layout Standard
758 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
759 a few minor differences.
762 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
773 command lists the available templates.
774 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
775 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
776 and possibly propose text fragments
778 for the document, features
779 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
782 you would otherwise need to
783 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
785 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
789 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
793 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
801 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
807 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
808 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
812 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
820 \begin_layout Standard
821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
853 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
854 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
855 is just that — a big, blank space.
863 \begin_layout Standard
884 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
889 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
892 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
910 will reload the document from disk.
911 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
912 and want to restore it to the last save.
921 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
922 them as your changes.
925 \begin_layout Section
926 Basic Editing Features
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
939 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
946 \begin_layout Standard
947 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
948 can perform cut and paste operations
949 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
950 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
951 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
952 editing features and how to access
954 We will start with cut and paste.
957 \begin_layout Standard
958 As you might expect, the
962 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
963 various other editing features.
964 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
968 \begin_layout Itemize
974 \begin_inset Index idx
977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1006 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset Index idx
1015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_layout Itemize
1050 \begin_inset Index idx
1053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1078 \begin_layout Itemize
1082 \begin_inset space ~
1088 \begin_layout Itemize
1092 \begin_inset space ~
1098 \begin_layout Itemize
1102 \begin_inset space ~
1106 \begin_inset space ~
1112 \begin_inset Index idx
1115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1124 \begin_inset Index idx
1127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1142 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1152 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1158 \begin_layout Standard
1159 The first three are self-explanatory.
1160 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1161 and other programs by
1182 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1183 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1188 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1189 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1190 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1191 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1192 into individual cells.
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1201 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1202 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1206 \begin_layout Standard
1210 \begin_inset space ~
1215 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1217 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1232 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1233 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1234 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1240 \begin_inset space \space{}
1243 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1244 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1250 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1269 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1270 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1272 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1282 start a new paragraph.
1283 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1284 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1289 \begin_inset space ~
1292 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1298 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1309 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1312 paste from the primary selection.
1313 This is normally the currently selected text.
1316 \begin_layout Standard
1319 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1321 \begin_inset space ~
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1337 \begin_inset space ~
1343 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1349 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1352 \begin_inset space ~
1361 \begin_inset space ~
1366 button to skip the current word.
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1375 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1384 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1386 If the toggle is set, searching for
1387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1398 will not match the word
1399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1413 Match whole words only
1415 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1416 to only find complete words, e.
1417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1446 offers also an advanced
1449 \begin_inset space ~
1453 \begin_inset space ~
1458 feature that is described in section
1459 \begin_inset space ~
1463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1465 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1472 \begin_layout Standard
1473 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1474 \begin_inset space \space{}
1478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1486 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1488 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1493 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1500 \begin_layout Standard
1504 arg "inset-select-all"
1507 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1508 When the cursor is inside an inset
1511 arg "inset-select-all"
1514 selects the content of the inset.
1518 arg "inset-select-all"
1521 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1526 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1529 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1533 \begin_layout Section
1535 \begin_inset Index idx
1538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1545 \begin_inset Index idx
1548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1557 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1564 \begin_layout Standard
1565 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1567 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1570 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1573 or the toolbar button
1579 to undo some mistake.
1580 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1585 or the toolbar button
1592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1599 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1603 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1606 \begin_layout Standard
1607 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1616 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1617 This is a consequence of the 100
1618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1621 step undo limit mentioned above.
1624 \begin_layout Standard
1633 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1635 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset Index idx
1644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1653 \begin_layout Standard
1654 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1657 \begin_layout Enumerate
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 once anywhere in the edit window.
1668 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1672 \begin_layout Enumerate
1677 \begin_layout Itemize
1684 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1687 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1690 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1691 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1694 \begin_layout Itemize
1695 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1698 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 \begin_layout Enumerate
1706 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1710 \begin_layout Standard
1711 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1712 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1716 \begin_layout Section
1718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1720 name "sec:Navigating"
1725 \begin_inset Index idx
1728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1737 \begin_layout Standard
1739 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1742 \begin_layout Itemize
1747 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1748 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1751 \begin_layout Itemize
1752 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1754 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1756 \begin_inset space ~
1761 or by the toolbar button
1764 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1770 \begin_layout Itemize
1771 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1773 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1776 and use the same menu to return to them.
1777 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1784 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1789 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1790 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1792 \begin_inset space ~
1797 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1798 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1799 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1800 your last editing position.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1812 \begin_layout Subsection
1814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1816 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1821 \begin_inset Index idx
1824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1825 Navigating ! Outline
1831 \begin_inset Index idx
1834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1843 \begin_layout Standard
1844 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1845 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1846 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1848 \begin_inset space ~
1852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1854 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1858 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1865 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1870 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1874 \begin_layout Standard
1875 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1876 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1877 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1878 dialog and to modify the citation.
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1886 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1887 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1889 Labels and References
1891 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1900 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1903 \begin_layout Standard
1904 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1905 you further to control the display.
1910 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1911 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1917 option keeps it in the current view state.
1918 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1919 \begin_inset space ~
1922 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1923 \begin_inset space ~
1926 3, the subsections of sections
1927 \begin_inset space ~
1930 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1935 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1950 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1953 \begin_layout Standard
1960 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1961 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1975 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1976 So, for example, you can move section
1977 \begin_inset space ~
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 2.4 or after section
1985 \begin_inset space ~
1990 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2003 (or the corresponding key bindings
2011 ) you can change the level of sections.
2012 So you can for example make section
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2017 \begin_inset space ~
2021 \begin_inset space ~
2027 \begin_layout Standard
2028 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2029 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2032 \begin_layout Subsection
2033 Horizontal Scrolling
2034 \begin_inset Index idx
2037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2038 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2046 \begin_layout Standard
2048 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2054 \begin_inset space \space{}
2058 \begin_inset space ~
2061 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2062 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2063 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2067 \begin_layout Standard
2068 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2072 \begin_layout Itemize
2074 is used on a small tablet computer
2077 \begin_layout Itemize
2078 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2090 \begin_inset space ~
2103 \begin_layout Itemize
2104 Math constructs with long command names
2107 \begin_layout Standard
2108 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2109 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2111 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2112 windows so that table
2113 \begin_inset space ~
2117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2119 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2124 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2126 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2127 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2130 \begin_layout Standard
2131 \begin_inset Float table
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2144 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2148 Horizontal scrolling test.
2156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2158 \begin_inset Tabular
2159 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2160 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2205 \begin_layout Section
2206 Input/Word Completion
2207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2209 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2214 \begin_inset Index idx
2217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2224 \begin_inset Index idx
2227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2260 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2262 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2263 is used to propose completions.
2266 \begin_layout Standard
2267 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2270 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2275 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2282 \begin_inset space ~
2286 \begin_inset space ~
2291 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2300 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2301 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2305 \begin_inset space ~
2311 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2312 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2313 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2314 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2317 \begin_layout Standard
2319 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2320 completions available.
2325 key to accept a proposed completion.
2326 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2327 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2328 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2335 \begin_layout Standard
2336 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2337 ing options for text.
2338 The special math option
2342 enables characters to be composed.
2343 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2344 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2347 , you can then input the characters
2348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2359 to a formula to get it.
2360 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2361 of the math toolbar.
2362 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2366 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2367 's installation folder.
2368 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2377 \begin_layout Section
2379 \begin_inset Index idx
2382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2389 \begin_inset Index idx
2392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2421 \begin_inset Index idx
2424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2455 \begin_layout Standard
2456 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2470 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2473 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2477 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2478 \begin_inset space ~
2482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2484 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2491 \begin_layout Standard
2495 \begin_inset space ~
2503 \begin_inset space ~
2524 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2528 \begin_layout Labeling
2529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2533 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2534 LatexCommand nomenclature
2536 description "Tabulator key"
2543 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2545 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2546 \begin_inset space ~
2550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2552 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2559 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2563 , especially section
2564 \begin_inset space ~
2568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2570 reference "subsec:Lists"
2576 If you are still confused, look in the
2581 \begin_inset Newline newline
2589 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2590 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2594 \begin_layout Labeling
2595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2599 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2600 LatexCommand nomenclature
2602 description "Escape key"
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2617 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2618 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2621 \begin_layout Labeling
2622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2628 \begin_inset space ~
2632 \begin_inset space ~
2639 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2640 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2644 \begin_layout Standard
2645 There are three modifier keys:
2648 \begin_layout Labeling
2649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2667 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2668 LatexCommand nomenclature
2670 description "Control key"
2675 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2676 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2680 \begin_layout Itemize
2689 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2692 \begin_layout Itemize
2701 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2704 \begin_layout Itemize
2713 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2717 \begin_layout Labeling
2718 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2736 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2737 LatexCommand nomenclature
2739 description "Shift key"
2744 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2745 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2748 \begin_layout Labeling
2749 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2767 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2768 LatexCommand nomenclature
2770 description "Alt or Meta key"
2775 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2776 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2777 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2783 \begin_inset Newline newline
2786 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2788 menu accelerator keys
2791 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2792 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2796 \begin_layout Standard
2797 For example, the sequence
2798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2804 \begin_inset space ~
2808 \begin_inset space ~
2814 \begin_inset space ~
2822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2841 \begin_inset space ~
2847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2857 \begin_layout Standard
2862 manual lists all other things bound to the
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2871 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2873 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2874 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2875 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2876 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2877 The \SpecialChar LyX
2878 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2879 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2880 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2882 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2898 followed by a capital
2905 \begin_layout Chapter
2908 \begin_inset Index idx
2911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 \begin_layout Section
2923 \begin_inset Index idx
2926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2935 \begin_layout Subsection
2939 \begin_layout Standard
2940 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2941 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2942 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2943 numbering schemes, and so on.
2944 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2945 and format the title of your document differently.
2948 \begin_layout Standard
2953 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2954 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2955 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2956 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2957 picks one for you by default.
2958 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2961 \begin_layout Subsection
2963 \begin_inset Index idx
2966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2975 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2982 \begin_layout Standard
2983 You can select a class using the
2985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2986 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2990 \begin_inset Index idx
2993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3000 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3008 \begin_layout Standard
3009 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3014 \begin_layout Description
3015 Article for basic articles
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Report for basic reports
3022 \begin_layout Description
3023 Book for writing a book
3026 \begin_layout Description
3027 Letter for US-style letters
3030 \begin_layout Standard
3031 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3032 only uses if you have installed
3033 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3034 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3035 distributions will include
3037 Here are some of the classes.
3038 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3040 Special Document Classes
3049 \begin_layout Description
3050 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3058 \begin_layout Description
3059 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3063 \begin_layout Description
3064 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3065 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3066 There are three article layouts available.
3067 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3068 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3069 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3070 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3075 sequential numbering
3076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3079 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3080 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3081 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3082 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Beamer Layout for presentations
3089 \begin_layout Description
3090 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3091 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3092 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3093 with \SpecialChar LyX
3097 \begin_layout Description
3098 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3101 \begin_layout Description
3103 \begin_inset space ~
3106 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3109 \begin_layout Description
3110 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3113 \begin_layout Description
3114 Foils Used to make transparencies
3117 \begin_layout Description
3118 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3119 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3120 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3121 with \SpecialChar LyX
3125 \begin_layout Description
3126 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3127 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3130 \begin_layout Description
3131 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3134 \begin_layout Description
3135 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3138 \begin_layout Description
3139 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3140 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3141 (Is used by this document.)
3144 \begin_layout Description
3145 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3148 \begin_layout Description
3149 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3152 \begin_layout Description
3157 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3158 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3160 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3164 \begin_layout Description
3165 Slides Used to make transparencies
3168 \begin_layout Description
3170 \begin_inset space ~
3173 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3174 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3177 \begin_layout Description
3178 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3181 \begin_layout Standard
3182 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3184 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3186 Special Document Classes
3193 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3194 of the document classes.
3197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3201 \begin_layout Standard
3202 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3204 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3205 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3207 \begin_inset Index idx
3210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3227 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3228 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3230 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3233 \begin_layout Standard
3236 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3241 , are highly specialized.
3243 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3244 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3245 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3246 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3247 by some document class.
3248 There are just too many of them.
3249 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3252 \begin_layout Standard
3253 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3261 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3262 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3263 document class for a new file.
3265 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3268 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3275 manual for information on how to install them.
3276 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3282 \begin_layout Standard
3283 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3284 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3285 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3286 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 class files to be used for dissertation
3288 s submitted to those universities.
3289 The \SpecialChar LyX
3290 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3292 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3296 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3302 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3309 name "subsec:Modules"
3314 \begin_inset Index idx
3317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3326 \begin_layout Standard
3327 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3328 chosen document class.
3329 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3330 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3337 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3341 \begin_inset Index idx
3344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3351 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 packages or file format converters that are not always
3358 installed by default.
3360 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3361 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3362 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3363 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3365 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 file without the missing prerequisites.
3367 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3368 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3371 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3375 \begin_inset Index idx
3378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3379 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3385 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3390 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3393 \begin_layout Standard
3394 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3402 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3404 will advise you about these things.
3412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3416 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3421 \begin_inset Index idx
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3425 Document ! Local Layout
3433 \begin_layout Standard
3434 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3435 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3436 : They are intended to be used in
3437 a variety of different documents.
3438 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3439 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3440 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3441 need a specific inset or
3442 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3444 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3447 style only that one time.
3448 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3450 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3468 manual for information on how to use it.
3471 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3475 \begin_layout Standard
3476 Each class has a default set of options.
3477 Here's a quick table describing them:
3480 \begin_layout Standard
3481 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3487 \begin_layout Standard
3489 \begin_inset Tabular
3490 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3491 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3492 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3493 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3494 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3495 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3496 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_layout Standard
3951 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3957 \begin_layout Standard
3958 You're probably also wondering what
3959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3963 \begin_inset space ~
3967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3971 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3972 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3977 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3982 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3992 headings, there are also
4000 headings, and so on.
4001 We will describe these headings fully in section
4002 \begin_inset space ~
4006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4008 reference "subsec:Headings"
4015 \begin_layout Subsection
4017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4019 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4024 \begin_inset Index idx
4027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4034 \begin_inset Index idx
4037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4046 \begin_layout Standard
4047 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4056 \begin_inset space ~
4064 \begin_inset space ~
4069 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4071 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4072 doesn't support special options you want to
4073 use for your document.
4074 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4075 -class and its options, you have to read
4079 \begin_layout Standard
4083 \begin_inset space ~
4090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4096 \begin_inset space ~
4101 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4102 You can choose between the following five options:
4105 \begin_layout Labeling
4106 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4111 Use default page style of current class.
4114 \begin_layout Labeling
4115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4120 No page numbers or headings.
4123 \begin_layout Labeling
4124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4132 \begin_layout Labeling
4133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4138 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4139 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4140 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4141 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4144 \begin_layout Labeling
4145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4150 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4151 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4157 \begin_inset Index idx
4160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4168 How they are defined is explained in section
4169 \begin_inset space ~
4173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4175 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4182 \begin_layout Standard
4183 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4184 \begin_inset space ~
4188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4190 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4197 \begin_layout Subsection
4198 Paper Size and Orientation
4199 \begin_inset Index idx
4202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4203 Document ! Paper size
4209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4211 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4218 \begin_layout Standard
4219 You can find the following options in the menu
4222 \begin_inset space ~
4229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4233 \begin_inset Index idx
4236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4245 \begin_layout Labeling
4246 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4250 \begin_inset space ~
4255 What size paper to print on.
4260 \begin_layout Itemize
4266 \begin_layout Itemize
4272 \begin_layout Itemize
4278 \begin_layout Itemize
4284 \begin_layout Itemize
4287 US letter, US legal, US executive
4290 \begin_layout Itemize
4296 \begin_layout Itemize
4303 \begin_layout Labeling
4304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4309 To choose whether to output as
4320 \begin_layout Labeling
4321 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4325 \begin_inset space ~
4330 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4331 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4334 \begin_layout Subsection
4336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4338 name "subsec:Margins"
4343 \begin_inset Index idx
4346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4353 \begin_inset Index idx
4356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4365 \begin_layout Standard
4366 Paper margins are set in the menu
4368 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4372 \begin_inset Index idx
4375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4384 \begin_layout Standard
4385 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4386 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4387 the paper format and the font size into account.
4390 \begin_layout Subsection
4394 \begin_layout Standard
4395 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4401 That includes the paragraph environments.
4402 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4403 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4404 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4406 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4415 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4417 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4418 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4419 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4422 \begin_layout Section
4423 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4424 \begin_inset Index idx
4427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4428 Paragraph ! Indentation
4436 \begin_layout Subsection
4438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4440 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4447 \begin_layout Standard
4448 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4449 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4452 \begin_layout Standard
4453 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4454 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4455 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4456 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4460 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4466 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4467 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4468 language than English.
4470 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4473 \begin_layout Standard
4474 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4475 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4476 into \SpecialChar LyX
4478 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4481 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4483 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4484 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4485 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4492 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4493 goes to produce a printable file.
4498 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4500 gives you the ability globally to change
4504 these pre-coded spacings.
4505 We will explain more later.
4508 \begin_layout Subsection
4509 Paragraph Separation
4510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4512 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4517 \begin_inset Index idx
4520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4521 Paragraph ! Separation
4529 \begin_layout Standard
4537 \begin_inset space ~
4545 \begin_inset space ~
4552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4556 \begin_inset Index idx
4559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4565 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4568 \begin_layout Subsection
4572 \begin_layout Standard
4573 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4576 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4578 \begin_inset space ~
4583 dialog and toggle the
4586 \begin_inset space ~
4591 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4594 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4598 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4599 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4603 \begin_layout Standard
4604 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4605 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4608 \begin_layout Subsection
4610 \begin_inset Index idx
4613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4614 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4622 \begin_layout Standard
4625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4629 \begin_inset Index idx
4632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4641 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4645 \begin_inset space ~
4654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4655 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4661 \begin_inset Index idx
4664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4671 installed to use this feature.
4676 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4678 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4680 \begin_inset space ~
4685 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4686 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4689 \begin_layout Section
4690 Paragraph Environments
4691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4693 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4698 \begin_inset Index idx
4701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4702 Paragraph ! Environments
4708 \begin_inset Index idx
4711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4712 Paragraph environments|(
4720 \begin_layout Subsection
4724 \begin_layout Standard
4725 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4728 \begin_layout Standard
4737 } \SpecialChar ldots
4747 \begin_inset Newline newline
4750 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4752 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4753 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4754 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4763 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4766 \begin_layout Standard
4767 A paragraph environment is simply a
4768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4775 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4776 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4777 scheme, labels, and so on.
4778 Additionally, you can
4779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4786 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4787 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4788 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4789 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4791 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4793 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4796 \begin_layout Standard
4797 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4798 \begin_inset Graphics
4799 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4805 at the left end of the toolbar.
4807 will change the environment of the
4811 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4812 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4813 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4817 \begin_layout Standard
4826 create a new paragraph using the
4830 paragraph environment.
4832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4839 because if you are in one of these environments:
4842 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 \begin_layout Itemize
4854 \begin_layout Itemize
4860 \begin_layout Itemize
4866 \begin_layout Itemize
4872 \begin_layout Itemize
4878 \begin_layout Itemize
4884 \begin_layout Standard
4886 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4890 , rather than resetting it to
4895 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4896 \begin_inset space ~
4900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4902 reference "sec:Nesting"
4909 \begin_layout Subsection
4913 \begin_layout Standard
4914 The default paragraph environment is
4919 It creates a plain paragraph.
4921 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4922 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4923 this manual) are in the
4930 \begin_layout Standard
4931 You can nest a paragraph using the
4935 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4943 \begin_layout Subsection
4945 \begin_inset Index idx
4948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4957 \begin_layout Standard
4958 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4959 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4968 for thanks or contact information.
4969 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4970 places all of this on a separate page
4971 along with today's date.
4972 For other types of documents, the title
4973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4980 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4984 \begin_layout Standard
4986 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5000 Here's how you use them:
5003 \begin_layout Itemize
5004 Put the title of your document in the
5011 \begin_layout Itemize
5012 Put the author name in the
5019 \begin_layout Itemize
5020 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5021 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5027 Note that using this environment is optional.
5028 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5029 will automatically insert today's date.
5030 If you don't want a date, use the option
5032 Suppress default date on front page
5036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5037 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5039 \begin_inset space ~
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5048 You can use footnotes to insert
5049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5056 or contact information.
5059 \begin_layout Subsection
5061 \begin_inset Index idx
5064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5073 name "subsec:Headings"
5080 \begin_layout Standard
5081 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5083 takes care of the numbering for you.
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Numbered
5100 \begin_layout Standard
5101 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5105 \begin_layout Enumerate
5111 \begin_layout Enumerate
5117 \begin_layout Enumerate
5123 \begin_layout Enumerate
5129 \begin_layout Enumerate
5135 \begin_layout Enumerate
5141 \begin_layout Enumerate
5147 \begin_layout Standard
5149 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5150 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5151 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5156 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5157 You group the book into chapters.
5159 does a similar grouping:
5162 \begin_layout Itemize
5167 is divided into either
5178 \begin_layout Itemize
5190 \begin_layout Itemize
5202 \begin_layout Itemize
5214 \begin_layout Itemize
5226 \begin_layout Itemize
5238 \begin_layout Standard
5239 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5247 Not all document types use the
5251 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5256 is the top-level heading.
5264 \begin_layout Standard
5269 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5270 labels it with its number,
5271 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5273 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5287 \begin_inset Index idx
5290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5291 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5299 \begin_layout Standard
5300 The unnumbered section headings have a
5301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5308 at the end of their name.
5309 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5310 the table of contents, see section
5311 \begin_inset space ~
5315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5325 Changing the Numbering
5326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5328 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5335 \begin_layout Standard
5336 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5337 in the Table of Contents.
5338 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5340 Just as certain classes start with
5354 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5364 This is something you can change.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5370 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5374 \begin_inset Index idx
5377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5386 \begin_inset space ~
5390 \begin_inset space ~
5395 you will see two counters.
5400 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5401 numbers a section heading.
5402 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5407 Short Titles of Headings
5408 \begin_inset Index idx
5411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5412 Section headings ! Short titles
5418 \begin_inset Argument 1
5421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5430 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5437 \begin_layout Standard
5438 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5439 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5440 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5441 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5444 \begin_layout Standard
5446 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5447 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5448 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5449 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5454 \begin_inset space ~
5460 This will insert a box labeled
5461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5465 \begin_inset space ~
5469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5472 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5473 This also works for captions inside floats.
5474 There can only be one short title per title.
5477 \begin_layout Standard
5478 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5485 \begin_layout Standard
5486 The following information applies to all section headings:
5489 \begin_layout Itemize
5490 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5493 \begin_layout Itemize
5494 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5497 \begin_layout Itemize
5498 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5501 \begin_layout Itemize
5502 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5505 \begin_layout Subsection
5509 \begin_layout Standard
5511 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5525 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5526 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5527 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5528 the text they contain.
5529 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5537 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5540 \begin_layout Standard
5541 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5550 when you start a new paragraph.
5551 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5555 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5556 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5557 have to change back to the
5561 environment yourself.
5564 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5573 \begin_inset Index idx
5576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5587 time for the differences.
5596 are identical except for one difference:
5600 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5609 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5612 \begin_layout Standard
5613 Here's an example of the
5626 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5628 See – no indentation!
5632 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5633 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5634 the other paragraph.
5637 \begin_layout Standard
5638 Here's another example, this time in the
5645 \begin_layout Quotation
5651 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5652 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5653 the first line, then
5657 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5661 you were quoting other text.
5664 \begin_layout Quotation
5665 Here's a new paragraph.
5666 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5667 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5670 \begin_layout Standard
5671 As the examples show,
5675 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5676 They should put quotes in the
5681 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5685 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5690 \begin_inset Index idx
5693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5700 \begin_inset Index idx
5703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5719 \begin_layout Standard
5724 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5730 \begin_inset Newline newline
5733 Which I did not rehearse!
5737 It could be much worse.
5738 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5740 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5741 indented a bit more than the first.
5742 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5748 \begin_inset Newline newline
5751 And make things look fine
5752 \begin_inset Newline newline
5758 arg "newline-insert newline"
5764 \begin_layout Standard
5769 does not indent both margins.
5770 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5771 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5774 arg "newline-insert newline"
5780 \begin_layout Subsection
5782 \begin_inset Index idx
5785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5801 \begin_layout Standard
5803 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5813 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5814 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5823 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5824 lets you provide your own label.
5825 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5826 describing some general features of all four of them.
5829 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5833 \begin_layout Standard
5834 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5836 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5837 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5846 reset the environment to
5850 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5851 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5852 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5860 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5867 \begin_layout Standard
5868 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5869 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5870 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5872 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5873 you read all of section
5874 \begin_inset space ~
5878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5880 reference "sec:Nesting"
5887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5889 \begin_inset Index idx
5892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5908 \begin_layout Standard
5909 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5913 paragraph environment.
5914 It has the following properties:
5917 \begin_layout Itemize
5918 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5927 \begin_layout Itemize
5928 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5932 \begin_layout Itemize
5933 The items can have any length.
5935 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5936 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5948 environment inside another
5952 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5956 \begin_layout Itemize
5957 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5960 \begin_layout Itemize
5962 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5965 \begin_layout Itemize
5967 \begin_inset space ~
5971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5973 reference "sec:Nesting"
5977 for a full explanation of nesting.
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5991 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5994 \begin_layout Standard
5995 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5996 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5999 \begin_layout Itemize
6000 The label for the first level
6004 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6008 \begin_layout Itemize
6009 The label for the second level is a dash.
6013 \begin_layout Itemize
6014 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6018 \begin_layout Itemize
6019 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6023 \begin_layout Itemize
6024 Back out to the third level.
6028 \begin_layout Itemize
6029 Back to the second level.
6033 \begin_layout Itemize
6034 Back to the outermost level.
6037 \begin_layout Standard
6038 These are the default labels for an
6043 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6045 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6048 dialog in the submenu
6053 \begin_inset Index idx
6056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6062 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6067 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6068 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6070 \begin_inset space ~
6074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6076 reference "sec:Nesting"
6083 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6085 \begin_inset Index idx
6088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6097 name "sec:Enumerate"
6104 \begin_layout Standard
6109 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6110 It has these properties:
6113 \begin_layout Enumerate
6114 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6128 \begin_layout Enumerate
6133 environment resets the counter to one.
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6149 \begin_layout Enumerate
6150 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6151 Items can have any length.
6154 \begin_layout Enumerate
6155 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6158 \begin_layout Enumerate
6159 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6162 \begin_layout Enumerate
6163 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6176 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6178 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6179 labels the four different levels in an
6186 \begin_layout Enumerate
6187 The first level of an
6191 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6195 \begin_layout Enumerate
6196 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6200 \begin_layout Enumerate
6201 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6205 \begin_layout Enumerate
6206 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6209 \begin_layout Enumerate
6210 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6215 \begin_layout Enumerate
6216 Back to the third level
6220 \begin_layout Enumerate
6221 Back to the second level.
6225 \begin_layout Enumerate
6226 Back to the outermost level.
6229 \begin_layout Standard
6230 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6234 environment, see section
6235 \begin_inset space ~
6239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6241 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6246 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6250 \begin_layout Standard
6251 There is more to nesting
6255 environments than we've stated here.
6256 You should read section
6257 \begin_inset space ~
6261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6263 reference "sec:Nesting"
6267 to learn more about nesting.
6270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6272 \begin_inset Index idx
6275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6284 \begin_layout Standard
6285 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6289 list has no fixed label.
6290 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6299 of the first line as the label.
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Example: This is an example of the
6311 \begin_layout Standard
6313 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6317 \begin_layout Standard
6319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6326 it is meant that the first usage of the
6330 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6332 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6340 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6346 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6348 \begin_inset space ~
6354 \begin_inset space ~
6358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6360 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6364 for more information.) Here is an example:
6367 \begin_layout Description
6369 \begin_inset space ~
6372 Example: This one shows how to use a
6375 \begin_inset space ~
6387 \begin_layout Description
6388 Usage: You should use the
6392 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6393 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6395 It's not a good idea to use a
6399 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6400 You're better off using
6412 paragraphs into them.
6415 \begin_layout Description
6416 Nesting: You can nest
6420 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6424 \begin_layout Standard
6425 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6426 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6427 them from the first line.
6430 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6432 \begin_inset Index idx
6435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6444 \begin_layout Standard
6449 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6450 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6454 \begin_layout Standard
6463 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6465 Here are its properties:
6468 \begin_layout Labeling
6469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6471 \begin_inset space ~
6474 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6483 of each line as the item label.
6488 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6489 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6490 space as described above.
6493 \begin_layout Labeling
6494 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6495 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6496 uses different margins for the item label and the
6497 body of the item text.
6498 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6499 label width plus a little extra space.
6503 \begin_layout Labeling
6504 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6506 \begin_inset space ~
6509 width \SpecialChar LyX
6510 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6511 If the label width is larger, the label
6512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6519 into the first line.
6520 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6521 margin of the rest of the item text.
6524 \begin_layout Labeling
6525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6527 \begin_inset space ~
6530 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6535 environment has the same left margin.
6536 \begin_inset Newline newline
6539 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6542 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6544 \begin_inset space ~
6549 dialog (toolbar button
6552 arg "layout-paragraph"
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6564 determines the default label width.
6565 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6574 multiple times instead.
6575 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6585 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6588 \begin_inset space ~
6593 every time you alter a label in a
6598 \begin_inset Newline newline
6601 The predefined default width is the length of
6602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6610 \begin_inset space ~
6616 \begin_layout Standard
6621 list the same way as the
6625 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6631 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6635 \begin_layout Standard
6640 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6641 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6643 \begin_inset space ~
6647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6649 reference "sec:Nesting"
6653 to learn about nesting.
6656 \begin_layout Standard
6657 There is yet another feature of the
6661 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6662 left-justifies the item labels by
6664 You can use additional
6668 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6669 justifies the item label.
6674 are documented in section
6675 \begin_inset space ~
6679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6681 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6686 Here are some examples:
6689 \begin_layout Labeling
6690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6691 Left The default for
6698 \begin_layout Labeling
6699 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6700 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6707 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6710 \begin_layout Labeling
6711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6712 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6716 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6723 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6726 \begin_layout Subsection
6728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6730 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6735 \begin_inset Index idx
6738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6747 \begin_layout Standard
6748 The features described in this section require that the module
6750 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6752 is loaded in the document settings.
6753 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6759 \begin_inset Index idx
6762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6773 Custom Enumerate Lists
6774 \begin_inset Index idx
6777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6786 \begin_layout Standard
6788 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6794 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6795 There you add the command
6798 \begin_layout Standard
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6819 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6820 Code, look at section
6821 \begin_inset space ~
6825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6827 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6840 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6847 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6848 For capital Roman numerals replace
6860 in the command above.
6861 For Arabic numerals use
6869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6876 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6891 \begin_layout Standard
6893 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6901 You can only number 26
6902 \begin_inset space ~
6905 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6913 \begin_layout Standard
6914 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6915 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6918 \begin_layout Standard
6919 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6922 \begin_layout Enumerate
6923 \begin_inset Argument 1
6926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6952 \begin_layout Enumerate
6953 \begin_inset Argument 1
6956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6979 \begin_layout Enumerate
6984 \begin_layout Enumerate
6985 \begin_inset Argument 1
6988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7012 \begin_layout Enumerate
7013 \begin_inset Argument 1
7016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7042 \begin_layout Standard
7043 For this list these commands were used:
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7057 \begin_inset Newline newline
7065 \begin_inset Newline newline
7073 \begin_inset Newline newline
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7090 makes the label emphasized and
7099 \begin_layout Standard
7100 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7108 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7109 lists until you change the definition.
7117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7119 \begin_inset Index idx
7122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7123 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7131 \begin_layout Standard
7132 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7135 \begin_layout Enumerate
7136 \begin_inset Argument 1
7139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7158 \begin_inset Note Note
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7162 goes back to default numbering
7170 \begin_layout Enumerate
7174 \begin_layout Standard
7178 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7182 \begin_layout Standard
7183 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7188 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7189 to indicate that it is a resumed
7190 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7191 , but in the output.
7194 \begin_layout Standard
7195 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7203 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7212 \begin_layout Standard
7213 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7215 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7216 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7217 of a normal enumeration.
7218 There, insert the command
7221 \begin_layout Standard
7227 \begin_layout Standard
7232 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7236 \begin_layout Enumerate
7240 \begin_layout Enumerate
7244 \begin_layout Standard
7245 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7248 \begin_layout Enumerate
7249 \begin_inset Argument 1
7252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7268 This enumeration starts at 4
7271 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7273 \begin_inset Index idx
7276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7288 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7291 \begin_layout Itemize
7295 \begin_layout Itemize
7296 with standard spacing
7299 \begin_layout Standard
7300 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7302 Add there the command
7306 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7309 \begin_layout Itemize
7310 \begin_inset Argument 1
7313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 \begin_layout Itemize
7336 \begin_layout Itemize
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7348 \begin_inset Index idx
7351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7359 For more information see its documentation,
7360 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7371 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7373 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7374 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7378 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7381 \begin_layout Enumerate
7382 \begin_inset Argument 1
7385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7406 \begin_layout Enumerate
7407 with negative indentation
7410 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7411 Further Customization
7412 \begin_inset Index idx
7415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7416 Lists ! Customization
7424 \begin_layout Standard
7425 You can also change the style of description lists.
7429 \begin_layout Standard
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7436 changes the description label font, the command
7439 \begin_layout Standard
7445 \begin_layout Standard
7446 sets the list style.
7449 \begin_layout Standard
7450 An example where the command
7453 \begin_layout Standard
7458 itshape, style=nextline
7461 \begin_layout Standard
7465 \begin_layout Description
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7471 \begin_inset Argument 1
7474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7480 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7482 itshape, style=nextline
7492 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7493 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7497 \begin_layout Description
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7502 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7503 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7504 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7507 \begin_layout Standard
7508 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7514 \begin_inset Index idx
7517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7525 For more information see its documentation
7526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7536 \begin_layout Subsection
7538 \begin_inset Index idx
7541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7552 \begin_inset space ~
7555 Address: An Overview
7558 \begin_layout Standard
7559 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7560 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7568 \begin_inset space ~
7574 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7575 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7576 gags on the document.
7577 In contrast, you can use the
7584 \begin_inset space ~
7589 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7590 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7594 \begin_layout Standard
7595 Of course, you're not limited to using
7602 \begin_inset space ~
7611 \begin_inset space ~
7616 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7617 some European academic papers.
7620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7624 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7631 \begin_layout Standard
7636 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7637 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7641 \begin_inset space ~
7646 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7647 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7648 Here's an example of each:
7651 \begin_layout Right Address
7653 \begin_inset Newline newline
7657 \begin_inset Newline newline
7661 \begin_inset Newline newline
7664 When is it? What is today?
7667 \begin_layout Standard
7671 \begin_inset space ~
7677 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7679 the largest block of text on a single line.
7680 Here's an example of the
7687 \begin_layout Address
7689 \begin_inset Newline newline
7692 Where do I send this
7693 \begin_inset Newline newline
7696 Your post office and country
7699 \begin_layout Standard
7700 As you can see, both
7707 \begin_inset space ~
7712 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7717 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7718 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7724 This makes sense, since
7732 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7733 Thus, you have to use
7740 arg "newline-insert newline"
7745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7746 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7748 \begin_inset space ~
7752 \begin_inset space ~
7757 ) to start a new line in an
7764 \begin_inset space ~
7772 \begin_layout Subsection
7776 \begin_layout Standard
7777 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7778 or list of references.
7780 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7785 \begin_inset Index idx
7788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7797 \begin_layout Standard
7802 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7803 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7804 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7805 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7819 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7820 The book document classes ignores the
7824 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7828 in a letter document class.
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7836 environment does several things for you.
7837 First, it puts the centered label
7838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7846 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7848 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7849 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7850 the subsequent text.
7851 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7853 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7857 \begin_layout Standard
7858 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7862 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7863 The new paragraph will still be in the
7868 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7869 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7872 \begin_layout Standard
7873 \begin_inset Float figure
7880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7882 \begin_inset Graphics
7883 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7891 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7896 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7917 \begin_layout Standard
7918 We would love to demonstrate the
7922 environment, but since this document is in the
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 class, we can't do this.
7931 We inserted it therefore as figure
7932 \begin_inset space ~
7936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7938 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7943 If you have never heard of an
7944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7951 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7954 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7956 \begin_inset Index idx
7959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7968 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7980 environment is used to list references.
7981 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7982 only use it at the end of the document.
7994 \begin_layout Standard
7995 When you first open a
7999 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8000 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8016 depending on the document class.
8017 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8018 Each paragraph of the
8022 environment is a bibliography entry.
8027 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8028 Each new paragraph is still in the
8035 \begin_layout Standard
8036 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8037 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8039 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8041 handling, have a look at section
8042 \begin_inset space ~
8046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8048 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8055 \begin_layout Subsection
8056 Special Environments
8059 \begin_layout Standard
8061 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8062 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8070 \begin_inset Index idx
8073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8083 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8090 \begin_layout Standard
8096 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8098 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8103 key as a fixed whitespace.
8107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8120 \begin_inset space ~
8125 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8143 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8146 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8149 arg "newline-insert newline"
8166 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8167 So, when you finish using the
8172 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8173 Also, you can nest the
8178 environment inside of others.
8181 \begin_layout Standard
8182 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8185 \begin_layout Itemize
8189 arg "newline-insert newline"
8192 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8197 \begin_inset space \space{}
8207 arg "newline-insert newline"
8213 \begin_layout Itemize
8217 arg "newline-insert newline"
8227 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8233 \begin_layout Itemize
8234 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8235 You must put at least one
8239 in any line you want blank.
8240 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8244 \begin_layout Itemize
8245 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8249 since that will insert
8254 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8257 arg "self-insert \""
8263 \begin_layout Standard
8267 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8271 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8275 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8279 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8283 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8284 printf("Hello World!
8289 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8293 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8297 \begin_layout Standard
8298 This is just the standard
8299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8310 \begin_layout Standard
8316 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8318 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8319 as if you used a typewriter.
8320 \begin_inset Index idx
8323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8324 Paragraph environments|)
8329 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8332 Program Code Listings
8337 \begin_inset space ~
8345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8349 \begin_inset Index idx
8352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8361 \begin_layout Standard
8366 environment is similar to the
8371 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8372 computer console text.
8377 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8391 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8392 you can have empty lines.
8405 \begin_layout Itemize
8406 have a certain language and a text style
8409 \begin_layout Itemize
8410 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8411 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8412 and \SpecialChar TeX
8416 \begin_layout Standard
8417 Because of these properties
8421 works like a typewriter.
8425 \begin_layout Verbatim
8430 \begin_layout Verbatim
8434 The following 2 lines are empty:
8437 \begin_layout Verbatim
8441 \begin_layout Verbatim
8445 \begin_layout Verbatim
8447 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8452 \begin_layout Standard
8457 environment is identical to
8461 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8462 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8469 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8474 \begin_layout Section
8475 Nesting Environments
8476 \begin_inset Index idx
8479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8480 Nesting ! Environments
8486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8495 \begin_layout Subsection
8499 \begin_layout Standard
8501 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8503 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8505 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8507 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8519 \begin_layout Enumerate
8523 \begin_layout Enumerate
8528 \begin_layout Enumerate
8532 \begin_layout Enumerate
8537 \begin_layout Enumerate
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8543 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8547 \begin_inset space ~
8551 \begin_inset space ~
8559 \begin_inset space ~
8563 \begin_inset space ~
8568 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8570 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8573 arg "depth-increment"
8579 arg "depth-decrement"
8593 arg "depth-increment"
8599 arg "depth-decrement"
8603 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8604 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8608 \begin_layout Standard
8609 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8610 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8611 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8612 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8613 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8616 \begin_layout Standard
8617 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8619 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8621 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8624 \begin_layout Subsection
8625 What You Can and Can't Nest
8628 \begin_layout Standard
8629 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8630 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8633 \begin_layout Standard
8634 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8635 than a simple yes or no.
8636 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8640 Completely unnestable
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8653 \begin_layout Standard
8654 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8655 environments have them:
8658 \begin_layout Description
8659 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8660 Can't nest into them.
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Description
8697 \begin_inset space ~
8700 Nestable You can nest them.
8701 You can nest other things into them.
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_layout Description
8768 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8769 You can't nest anything into them.
8773 \begin_layout Itemize
8779 \begin_layout Itemize
8785 \begin_layout Itemize
8791 \begin_layout Itemize
8797 \begin_layout Itemize
8803 \begin_layout Itemize
8809 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8827 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Itemize
8851 \begin_layout Itemize
8855 \begin_inset space ~
8861 \begin_layout Itemize
8868 \begin_layout Standard
8869 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8877 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8887 \begin_inset space ~
8890 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8891 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8892 nested section headings violate this.
8900 \begin_layout Subsection
8901 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8902 \begin_inset Index idx
8905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8906 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8914 \begin_layout Standard
8915 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8916 affected by nesting anyhow.
8920 \begin_layout Itemize
8924 \begin_layout Itemize
8928 \begin_layout Itemize
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8934 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8942 Figures and tables in
8946 are not affected by this.
8951 Have a look at section
8952 \begin_inset space ~
8956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8958 reference "sec:Floats"
8962 for more information about
8969 \begin_layout Standard
8971 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8972 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8977 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8985 of its own, it behaves just like a
8986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8993 paragraph environment.
8994 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8998 \begin_layout Standard
8999 Here's an example with a table:
9002 \begin_layout Enumerate
9007 \begin_layout Enumerate
9008 This is (a) and it's nested.
9012 \begin_layout Standard
9013 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9021 \begin_inset Tabular
9022 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9023 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9024 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9025 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 \begin_layout Standard
9110 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9117 \begin_layout Enumerate
9119 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9123 \begin_layout Enumerate
9127 \begin_layout Standard
9128 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9131 \begin_layout Enumerate
9136 \begin_layout Enumerate
9137 This is (a) and it's nested.
9141 \begin_layout Standard
9142 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9150 \begin_inset Tabular
9151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9152 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9238 \begin_layout Standard
9239 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9245 \begin_layout Enumerate
9252 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9255 \begin_layout Enumerate
9259 \begin_layout Standard
9260 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9264 \begin_layout Standard
9265 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9268 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9271 \begin_layout Enumerate
9276 \begin_layout Enumerate
9277 This is (a) and it's nested.
9280 \begin_layout Standard
9281 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9289 \begin_inset Tabular
9290 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9291 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9292 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9293 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9378 \begin_layout Standard
9379 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9385 \begin_layout Enumerate
9387 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9394 \begin_layout Enumerate
9398 \begin_layout Standard
9399 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9405 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9406 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9410 \begin_layout Subsection
9411 Usage and General Features
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9416 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9425 is the innermost possible depth.
9426 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9429 \begin_layout Enumerate
9430 level #1 – outermost
9434 \begin_layout Enumerate
9439 \begin_layout Enumerate
9444 \begin_layout Enumerate
9449 \begin_layout Itemize
9454 \begin_layout Itemize
9463 \begin_layout Standard
9464 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9465 both of them in the example.
9466 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9476 For example, if we tried to nest another
9481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9488 , we would get errors.
9491 \begin_layout Subsection
9493 \begin_inset Index idx
9496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9505 \begin_layout Standard
9506 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9507 We have several examples of nested environments.
9508 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9512 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9513 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9516 \begin_layout Labeling
9517 \labelwidthstring MMM
9518 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9527 \begin_layout Labeling
9528 \labelwidthstring MMM
9529 #2-a This is level #2.
9530 We created it by using
9533 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9539 arg "depth-increment"
9546 \begin_layout Labeling
9547 \labelwidthstring MMM
9548 #3-a This is level #3.
9549 This time, we just enter
9556 arg "depth-increment"
9560 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9564 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9570 arg "depth-increment"
9577 \begin_layout Standard
9582 environment, nested inside of
9583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9591 So, it's at level #4.
9592 We did this by entering
9595 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9601 arg "depth-increment"
9604 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9609 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9625 \begin_layout Standard
9630 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9633 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9639 \begin_layout Labeling
9640 \labelwidthstring MMM
9641 #4-a This is level #4.
9645 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9648 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9653 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9657 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9662 keep nesting things inside
9663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9674 \begin_layout Labeling
9675 \labelwidthstring MMM
9676 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9681 \begin_layout Labeling
9682 \labelwidthstring MMM
9683 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9684 and this is level #6.
9685 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9689 \begin_layout Labeling
9690 \labelwidthstring MMM
9691 #5-b Back to level #5.
9695 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9701 arg "depth-decrement"
9708 \begin_layout Labeling
9709 \labelwidthstring MMM
9713 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9719 arg "depth-decrement"
9722 , we're back at level #4.
9726 \begin_layout Labeling
9727 \labelwidthstring MMM
9728 #3-b Back to level #3.
9729 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9733 \begin_layout Labeling
9734 \labelwidthstring MMM
9735 #2-b Back to level #2.
9740 \begin_layout Labeling
9741 \labelwidthstring MMM
9742 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9743 After this sentence, we will enter
9747 and change the paragraph environment back to
9754 \begin_layout Standard
9755 We could have also used the
9771 environment in place of the
9776 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9780 Example 2: Inheritance
9783 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9784 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9787 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9796 arg "depth-increment"
9800 \begin_inset Newline newline
9803 which, we will change to the
9811 \begin_layout Enumerate
9816 environment, at level #2.
9819 \begin_layout Enumerate
9820 Notice how the nested
9824 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9828 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9832 \begin_layout Standard
9833 We ended this example by entering
9838 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9842 and reset the nesting depth by using
9845 arg "depth-decrement"
9851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9852 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9861 \begin_inset Argument 1
9864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9865 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9873 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 This is level #1, in an
9878 paragraph environment.
9879 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9883 \begin_layout Enumerate
9888 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9894 arg "depth-increment"
9898 Now, what happens if we nest an
9902 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9903 label be? An asterisk?
9907 \begin_layout Itemize
9917 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9918 So, its label is a bullet.
9919 (We got here by using
9922 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9928 arg "depth-increment"
9931 , then changing the environment to
9939 \begin_layout Itemize
9940 Here's level #4, produced using
9943 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9949 arg "depth-increment"
9953 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9961 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9966 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9970 , because we are in the
9978 environment (that is, it is an
9993 \begin_layout Enumerate
9998 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9999 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10003 \begin_layout Enumerate
10004 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10007 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10010 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10013 \begin_layout Enumerate
10017 arg "depth-decrement"
10020 to decrease the depth after the next
10023 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10030 \begin_layout Enumerate
10032 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10037 \begin_layout Enumerate
10039 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10040 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10044 \begin_layout Enumerate
10045 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10054 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10059 reset the counter for the label.
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10067 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10073 arg "depth-decrement"
10076 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10077 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10078 into the twofold-nested
10086 \begin_layout Enumerate
10087 The same thing happens if we do another
10090 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10096 arg "depth-decrement"
10099 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10102 \begin_layout Standard
10103 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10108 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10119 The number of other
10123 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10130 The same rule applies for the
10134 environment, as well.
10137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10138 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10141 \begin_layout Enumerate
10142 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10143 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10144 the same detail with how we did it.
10153 \begin_layout Standard
10161 arg "depth-increment"
10168 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10169 the example in parentheses someplace.
10170 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10171 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10172 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10176 \begin_layout Enumerate
10181 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10185 \begin_layout Verse
10186 Now we will add verse.
10187 \begin_inset Newline newline
10190 It will get much worse.
10191 \begin_inset Newline newline
10201 arg "depth-increment"
10211 \begin_layout Verse
10212 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10213 \begin_inset Newline newline
10216 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10217 \begin_inset Newline newline
10223 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10231 \begin_layout Verse
10232 Here comes a table:
10236 \begin_layout Standard
10237 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10243 \begin_layout Standard
10245 \begin_inset Tabular
10246 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10247 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10334 \begin_layout Verse
10338 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10348 arg "depth-increment"
10354 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10360 \begin_inset Newline newline
10368 arg "depth-decrement"
10375 \begin_layout Enumerate
10380 : level #1) This is another item.
10381 Note that selecting a
10385 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10386 3 times to put the table inside the
10394 \begin_layout Quotation
10395 We're now ending the
10399 list and changing to
10404 We're still at level #1.
10405 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10406 The next set of paragraphs is a
10407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10414 We will nest both the
10421 \begin_inset space ~
10426 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10430 for the letter body.
10434 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10437 to preserve the depth.
10438 Remember that you need to use
10441 arg "newline-insert newline"
10444 to create multiple lines inside the
10451 \begin_inset space ~
10461 \begin_layout Right Address
10463 \begin_inset Newline newline
10466 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10467 \begin_inset Newline newline
10473 \begin_layout Address
10475 \begin_inset space ~
10481 \begin_layout Quotation
10482 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10486 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10487 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10488 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10489 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10490 as soon as possible.
10491 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10494 \begin_layout Quotation
10495 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10496 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10497 with your order, along with payment.
10500 \begin_layout Quotation
10501 We thank you again for your patience.
10504 \begin_layout Address
10506 \begin_inset Newline newline
10513 \begin_layout Quotation
10514 That ends that example!
10517 \begin_layout Standard
10518 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10519 gives you a lot of power with just
10521 We could have easily nested an
10542 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10545 \begin_layout Subsection
10547 \begin_inset Index idx
10550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10551 Nesting ! Separation
10557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10559 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10566 \begin_layout Standard
10567 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10569 For example you need two different enumerations:
10572 \begin_layout Enumerate
10577 \begin_layout Enumerate
10582 \begin_layout Enumerate
10586 \begin_layout Standard
10587 \begin_inset Separator plain
10593 \begin_layout Itemize
10599 \begin_layout Standard
10600 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10606 \begin_layout Enumerate
10610 \begin_layout Enumerate
10614 \begin_layout Enumerate
10618 \begin_layout Standard
10619 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10620 list item and use the menu
10622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10623 Separated <Name> Above
10627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10628 Separated <Name> Below
10631 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10632 ) and before or behind it the
10634 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10639 (red arrow in LyX).
10640 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10641 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10644 \begin_layout Standard
10645 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10648 arg "paragraph-break"
10655 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10658 \begin_layout Section
10659 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10660 \begin_inset Index idx
10663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10672 \begin_layout Standard
10673 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10674 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10676 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10677 be broken at the end of a line.
10678 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10682 \begin_layout Subsection
10684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10686 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10691 \begin_inset Index idx
10694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10703 \begin_layout Standard
10704 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10705 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10706 ) not to break the line at
10708 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10711 \begin_layout Quote
10712 Further documentation is given in section
10713 \begin_inset Newline newline
10717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10719 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10727 \begin_layout Standard
10728 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10743 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10752 A protected space is set with
10754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10755 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10765 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10771 \begin_layout Subsection
10773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10775 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10780 \begin_inset Index idx
10783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10784 Spacing ! Horizontal
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10793 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10796 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10800 The length units are listed in Appendix
10801 \begin_inset space ~
10805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10807 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10814 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10818 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10823 \begin_inset Index idx
10826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10827 Spaces ! Inter-word
10835 \begin_layout Standard
10836 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10837 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10838 at the ends of sentences.
10839 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10840 automatically takes care about this.
10841 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10842 followed by a period; see section
10843 \begin_inset space ~
10847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10849 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10854 To insert a normal space, select
10856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10867 arg "space-insert normal"
10873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10877 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10882 \begin_inset Index idx
10885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10894 \begin_layout Standard
10896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10903 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10912 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10913 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10914 inside abbreviations:
10917 \begin_layout Quote
10919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10923 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10926 \begin_layout Standard
10927 or between values and units.
10928 Compare for example this:
10929 \begin_inset Newline newline
10933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10937 \begin_inset Newline newline
10940 10 kg (normal space
10943 \begin_layout Standard
10944 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10947 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10949 \begin_inset space ~
10957 arg "space-insert thin"
10963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10967 \begin_layout Standard
10968 You can also insert the following space types:
10971 \begin_layout Description
10973 \begin_inset space ~
10977 \begin_inset space ~
10980 space A line with a
10981 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10985 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10989 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10992 negative thin space between the arrows.
10995 \begin_layout Description
10997 \begin_inset space ~
11001 \begin_inset space ~
11004 space A line with a
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11009 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11013 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11016 negative medium space between the arrows.
11019 \begin_layout Description
11021 \begin_inset space ~
11025 \begin_inset space ~
11028 space A line with a
11029 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11033 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11037 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11040 negative thick space between the arrows.
11043 \begin_layout Description
11045 \begin_inset space ~
11049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11053 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11057 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11061 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11065 \begin_inset space ~
11069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11072 em) space between the arrows.
11075 \begin_layout Description
11077 \begin_inset space ~
11081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11085 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11089 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11093 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11097 \begin_inset space ~
11101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11104 em) space between the arrows.
11107 \begin_layout Description
11109 \begin_inset space ~
11113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11117 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11121 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11125 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11129 \begin_inset space ~
11133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11136 em) space between the arrows.
11139 \begin_layout Description
11141 \begin_inset space ~
11145 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11149 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11154 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11161 cm space between the arrows.
11164 \begin_layout Standard
11166 \begin_inset space ~
11170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11172 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11176 lists the different space sizes.
11179 \begin_layout Standard
11180 \begin_inset Float table
11187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11193 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11197 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset Tabular
11208 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11209 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11210 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11327 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11486 \begin_inset Index idx
11489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11499 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11500 feature for adding extra space
11501 in a uniform fashion.
11502 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11503 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11504 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11505 equally between themselves.
11508 \begin_layout Standard
11509 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11512 \begin_layout Quote
11514 This is on the left side
11515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11518 This is on the right
11521 \begin_layout Quote
11524 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11528 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11534 \begin_layout Quote
11537 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11541 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11545 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11551 \begin_layout Standard
11552 That was an example in the
11558 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11562 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11566 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11569 is one in a standard paragraph.
11570 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11574 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11577 \begin_layout Standard
11578 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11581 \begin_inset space ~
11586 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11589 \begin_layout Standard
11591 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11595 \begin_inset space ~
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11603 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11607 \begin_inset space ~
11613 \begin_layout Standard
11615 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11619 \begin_inset space ~
11625 \begin_layout Standard
11627 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11631 \begin_inset space ~
11637 \begin_layout Standard
11639 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11643 \begin_inset space ~
11649 \begin_layout Standard
11651 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11655 \begin_inset space ~
11661 \begin_layout Standard
11662 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11674 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11676 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11677 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11681 option in the space dialog.
11689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11693 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11698 \begin_inset Index idx
11701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11710 \begin_layout Standard
11711 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11712 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11715 \begin_layout Standard
11716 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11719 What is correct English?:
11720 \begin_inset Newline newline
11724 \begin_inset Newline newline
11728 \begin_inset space ~
11731 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11732 \begin_inset Newline newline
11736 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11747 \begin_inset Newline newline
11751 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11762 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11768 \begin_layout Standard
11770 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11775 \begin_inset space ~
11779 \begin_inset space ~
11783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11787 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11790 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11794 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11800 \begin_inset space ~
11804 \begin_inset space ~
11808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11811 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11820 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11821 That is why it is named
11822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11830 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11831 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11835 \begin_layout Subsection
11837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11839 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11844 \begin_inset Index idx
11847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11856 \begin_layout Standard
11857 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11860 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11862 \begin_inset space ~
11868 There you find the following sizes:
11871 \begin_layout Standard
11884 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11885 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11890 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11895 \begin_inset space ~
11901 \begin_inset Index idx
11904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11905 Document ! Settings
11910 for the paragraph separation.
11911 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11922 \begin_layout Standard
11928 \begin_inset Index idx
11931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11937 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11938 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11943 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11944 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11953 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11962 s are described in section
11963 \begin_inset space ~
11967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11969 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11978 If there are several
11982 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11983 You can therefore use
11987 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11990 \begin_layout Standard
11995 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11996 \begin_inset space ~
12000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12002 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12009 \begin_layout Standard
12010 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12020 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12021 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12033 \begin_layout Subsection
12034 Paragraph Alignment
12035 \begin_inset Index idx
12038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12039 Paragraph ! Alignment
12047 \begin_layout Standard
12048 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12050 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12053 dialog (toolbar button
12056 arg "layout-paragraph"
12060 There are five possibilities:
12063 \begin_layout Itemize
12071 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12077 \begin_layout Itemize
12085 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12091 \begin_layout Itemize
12099 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12105 \begin_layout Itemize
12113 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12119 \begin_layout Itemize
12127 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12133 \begin_layout Standard
12134 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12135 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12136 the left and right margins.
12137 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12140 \begin_layout Standard
12142 This paragraph is right aligned,
12145 \begin_layout Standard
12147 this one is centered,
12150 \begin_layout Standard
12152 this one is left aligned.
12155 \begin_layout Subsection
12157 \begin_inset Index idx
12160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12161 Page breaks ! Forced
12167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12169 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12176 \begin_layout Standard
12177 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12178 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12179 force a page break where you want one.
12180 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12181 is good at page breaking.
12182 Only if you use a lot of
12186 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12187 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12190 \begin_layout Standard
12191 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12192 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12196 have to change the page breaking.
12199 \begin_layout Standard
12200 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12202 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 \begin_inset space ~
12213 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12216 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12218 \begin_inset space ~
12223 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12225 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12226 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12229 \begin_layout Standard
12230 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12231 at the top of a page.
12232 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12234 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12235 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12236 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12240 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12244 to learn more about
12251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12255 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12260 \begin_inset Index idx
12263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12264 Page breaks ! Clear
12272 \begin_layout Standard
12273 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12274 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12275 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12276 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12277 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12280 \begin_layout Standard
12281 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12284 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12286 \begin_inset space ~
12292 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12295 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12297 \begin_inset space ~
12301 \begin_inset space ~
12306 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12307 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12310 \begin_layout Subsection
12312 \begin_inset Index idx
12315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12324 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12331 \begin_layout Standard
12332 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12334 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12337 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12339 \begin_inset space ~
12343 \begin_inset space ~
12351 arg "newline-insert newline"
12355 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12358 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12360 \begin_inset space ~
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12372 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12375 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12377 This is useful to avoid
12378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12385 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12388 \begin_layout Standard
12389 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12390 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12392 very good at line breaking.
12393 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12394 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12401 reference "sec:Quote"
12406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12408 reference "sec:Verse"
12413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12415 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12422 \begin_layout Subsection
12424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12426 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12431 \begin_inset Index idx
12434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12443 \begin_layout Standard
12445 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12456 \begin_layout Standard
12460 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12461 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12463 \begin_inset space ~
12468 you can insert horizontal lines.
12469 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12470 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12471 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12474 \begin_layout Standard
12476 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12487 \begin_layout Section
12488 Characters and Symbols
12491 \begin_layout Standard
12492 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12493 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12494 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12502 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12506 for information on how this is done.
12509 \begin_layout Standard
12510 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12515 dialog via the menu
12517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12518 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12524 \begin_layout Standard
12525 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12533 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12534 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12536 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12544 \begin_layout Section
12545 Fonts and Text Styles
12546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12548 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12555 \begin_layout Subsection
12557 \begin_inset Index idx
12560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12569 \begin_layout Standard
12570 There are two types of fonts:
12573 \begin_layout Description
12575 \begin_inset space ~
12579 \begin_inset Index idx
12582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12588 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12593 characters) in the font.
12594 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12595 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12596 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12597 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12598 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12599 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12600 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12601 \begin_inset Newline newline
12604 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12605 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12606 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12607 sizes than at small ones.
12608 \begin_inset Newline newline
12622 \begin_inset space ~
12630 \begin_layout Description
12632 \begin_inset space ~
12636 \begin_inset Index idx
12639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12645 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12646 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12647 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12648 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12649 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12650 image manipulation program.
12651 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12652 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12653 \begin_inset space ~
12656 pixels high up to 34
12657 \begin_inset space ~
12660 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12661 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12662 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12664 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12665 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12666 \begin_inset Newline newline
12669 Bitmap fonts are named
12672 \begin_inset space ~
12677 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12680 \begin_layout Standard
12681 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12682 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12683 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12684 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12685 use scalable fonts.
12688 \begin_layout Standard
12689 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12692 \begin_layout Standard
12693 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12695 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12697 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12700 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12701 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12702 font to emphasize text, you use an
12703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12711 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12713 In \SpecialChar LyX
12714 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12718 \begin_layout Subsection
12721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12723 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12730 \begin_layout Standard
12731 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12732 used its own fonts.
12733 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12734 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12737 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12738 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12739 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12740 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12741 to a word processor.
12742 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12743 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12744 files are very portable across
12745 different machines.
12746 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12747 has increased a lot
12748 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12751 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12753 \begin_inset space ~
12757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12759 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12764 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12765 code in the document
12766 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12769 \begin_layout Standard
12770 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12771 engines that are also able directly
12772 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12774 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12776 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12778 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12779 that is installed on your system.
12780 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12783 \begin_layout Standard
12784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12792 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12793 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12801 \begin_layout Subsection
12802 Document Font and Font size
12803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12805 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12810 \begin_inset Index idx
12813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12820 \begin_inset Index idx
12823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12832 \begin_layout Standard
12833 You can set the document fonts in the
12835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12839 \begin_inset Index idx
12842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12843 Document ! Settings
12853 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12854 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12857 \begin_inset space ~
12866 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12868 \begin_inset space ~
12871 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12874 \begin_layout Standard
12879 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12880 This requires that you use
12892 as the output format, i.
12893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12897 \begin_inset space \space{}
12900 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12901 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12902 installed (see section
12903 \begin_inset space ~
12907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12909 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12914 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12916 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12917 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12919 \begin_inset space ~
12922 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12923 cannot determine the family.
12924 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12925 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12928 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12931 \begin_layout Standard
12932 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12933 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12938 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12944 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12946 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12948 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12951 font encoding, this is
12952 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12953 , depending on the document language,
12956 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12957 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12981 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12982 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13004 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13025 European Computer Modern
13028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13036 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13039 \begin_layout Standard
13044 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13045 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13050 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13053 \begin_inset space ~
13058 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13064 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13065 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13068 \begin_layout Itemize
13072 \begin_inset space ~
13077 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13090 \begin_inset space ~
13095 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13096 community in order to replace
13100 as the default font.
13101 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13102 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13105 \begin_inset space ~
13118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13119 One difference is improved kerning.
13127 \begin_layout Itemize
13128 If you do not like the look of
13136 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13141 \begin_inset space ~
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13157 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13158 \begin_inset space ~
13161 serif and typewriter fonts,
13165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13166 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13182 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13187 \begin_inset space \space{}
13195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13199 \begin_inset space \space{}
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13223 but you can also select your own.
13224 \begin_inset Newline newline
13227 The differences between roman,
13230 \begin_inset space ~
13239 fonts are explained in section
13240 \begin_inset space ~
13244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13246 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13251 \begin_inset Newline newline
13257 \begin_inset space ~
13262 was originally designed for newspapers.
13263 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13264 into the small newspaper columns.
13268 \begin_inset space ~
13273 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13276 \begin_layout Standard
13277 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13290 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13295 depends on the class you are using.
13296 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13299 \begin_layout Standard
13300 Note that the font size is the
13305 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13306 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13307 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13308 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13311 \begin_inset space ~
13317 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13324 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13331 \begin_layout Standard
13335 \begin_inset space ~
13340 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13342 \begin_inset space ~
13345 serif or typewriter.
13350 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13360 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13363 \begin_layout Standard
13368 LaTeX font encoding
13370 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13371 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13377 \begin_inset Index idx
13380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13388 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13390 \begin_inset space ~
13394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13396 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13403 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13404 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13405 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13409 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13417 \begin_layout Standard
13418 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13420 Use Old Style Figures
13424 Use True Small Caps
13427 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13430 Use Old Style Figures
13432 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13434 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13442 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13446 Use True Small Caps
13448 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13449 of scaled capitals.
13450 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13451 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13454 \begin_layout Standard
13459 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13460 a font to display the script characters.
13464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13465 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13471 \begin_inset Index idx
13474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13481 So this has no effect for the document language
13497 \begin_layout Standard
13500 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13502 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13503 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13509 \begin_inset Index idx
13512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13514 packages ! microtype
13523 \begin_layout Standard
13526 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13528 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13533 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13534 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13540 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13541 \begin_inset space ~
13545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13547 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13557 \begin_layout Standard
13558 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13562 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13570 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13575 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13576 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13578 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13580 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13583 dialog, see section
13584 \begin_inset space ~
13588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13590 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13602 \begin_layout Subsection
13606 \begin_layout Standard
13607 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13608 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13610 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13611 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13612 choose a math font in the dialog
13614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13618 \begin_inset Index idx
13621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13622 Document ! Settings
13628 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13629 automatically selects a math font.
13630 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13631 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13640 \begin_inset space ~
13646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13651 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13652 document font is available.
13655 \begin_layout Standard
13656 Note that the math font will not be used for
13660 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13666 or by the insertion of the command
13673 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13674 \begin_inset space ~
13678 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13679 while the math characters do not.
13681 \begin_inset space ~
13684 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13687 \begin_inset space ~
13695 \begin_inset space ~
13700 in the document font settings.
13703 \begin_layout Standard
13704 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13705 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13706 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13707 font (in most cases
13708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13714 \begin_inset space ~
13720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13723 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13724 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13732 \begin_inset space ~
13738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13744 \begin_layout Subsection
13746 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13748 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13752 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13756 name "subsec:charstyles"
13763 \begin_inset Index idx
13766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13773 \begin_inset Index idx
13776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13785 \begin_layout Standard
13786 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13787 automatically changes the
13788 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13791 style for certain paragraph environments.
13793 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13794 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13796 This is where we meet the concept of
13802 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13815 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13817 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13839 e., available with all document classes.
13840 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13844 for specific purposes.
13845 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13848 \begin_layout Standard
13850 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13851 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13861 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13865 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13878 — you customized the
13883 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13884 among them, encourage the use of
13896 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13897 \begin_inset space ~
13901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13903 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13908 Rather than fiddling with
13912 , they encourage the use of
13916 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13921 \begin_inset Quotes els
13925 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13928 ), not their form (
13929 \begin_inset Quotes els
13933 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13937 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13938 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13939 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13940 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13941 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13942 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13948 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13952 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13953 With a semantic markup (such as
13957 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13962 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13964 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13965 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13968 \begin_layout Standard
13970 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13971 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13972 by \SpecialChar LyX
13978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13980 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13981 Builtin Text Styles
13982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13984 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13991 \begin_layout Standard
13993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
13994 The two builtin text styles can be
13995 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
13999 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14003 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14004 both of these styles
14007 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14015 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14021 \begin_layout Standard
14026 style, do one of the following:
14029 \begin_layout Itemize
14030 click on the toolbar button
14039 \begin_layout Itemize
14040 use the key binding
14047 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14051 \begin_layout Itemize
14053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14061 arg "dialog-show character"
14067 arg "dialog-show character"
14070 ) as described in section
14071 \begin_inset space ~
14075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14077 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14086 \begin_layout Standard
14087 These commands are all toggles.
14092 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14095 \begin_layout Standard
14096 One typically uses the
14100 style for proper names.
14102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14109 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14115 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14119 \begin_layout Standard
14121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14126 is producing text in
14130 , but the definition can be changed.
14135 \begin_layout Standard
14137 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14139 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14147 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14154 \begin_layout Itemize
14155 clicking on the toolbar button
14164 \begin_layout Itemize
14165 using the keybindings
14172 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14176 \begin_layout Itemize
14178 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14186 arg "dialog-show character"
14192 arg "dialog-show character"
14195 ) as described in section
14196 \begin_inset space ~
14200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14202 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14211 \begin_layout Standard
14216 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14218 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14220 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14223 packages use a different font
14224 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14225 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14231 \begin_layout Standard
14232 We've been using the
14236 style all over the place in this document.
14237 Here's one more example:
14240 \begin_layout Quotation
14244 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14246 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14252 \begin_layout Standard
14253 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14254 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14255 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14256 the common tendency to overuse
14257 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14259 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14264 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14268 \begin_layout Standard
14270 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14271 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14272 only as font changes and integrated in the
14280 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14283 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14290 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14292 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14296 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14299 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14301 \begin_inset space ~
14304 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14306 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14312 arg "dialog-show character"
14318 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14320 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14326 arg "dialog-show character"
14330 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14336 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14340 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14347 \begin_layout Standard
14349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14350 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14352 \begin_inset space ~
14356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14358 reference "subsec:Modules"
14365 ), or local layout settings (see section
14366 \begin_inset space ~
14370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14372 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14377 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14381 markup for specific functions.
14382 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14387 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14397 \begin_inset Quotes els
14401 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14407 \begin_layout Standard
14409 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14410 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14412 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14418 \begin_layout Standard
14420 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14421 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14426 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14427 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14428 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14433 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14434 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14439 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14447 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14448 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14449 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14450 \begin_inset Flex Code
14453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14455 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14464 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14469 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14478 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14483 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14492 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14493 on screen their formal appearance.
14498 \begin_layout Subsection
14500 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14512 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14514 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14520 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14522 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14528 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14533 \begin_inset Index idx
14536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14545 \begin_layout Standard
14546 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14550 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14552 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14554 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14558 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14559 the properties of text passages
14560 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14564 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14565 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14566 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14567 from ordinary dialog.
14568 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14572 \begin_layout Standard
14574 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14575 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14576 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14577 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14578 the properties of the respective text passages.
14583 comes in as a last resort.
14588 \begin_layout Standard
14589 Before we document how to
14590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14591 use custom character style
14592 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14593 tweak the text properties
14595 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14596 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14598 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14602 \begin_inset Newline newline
14605 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14606 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14609 \begin_layout Standard
14611 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14612 use custom character styles
14613 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14614 tweak text properties
14617 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14622 \begin_inset space ~
14625 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14627 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14633 arg "dialog-show character"
14638 dialog or press the toolbar button
14641 arg "dialog-show character"
14646 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14649 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14650 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14652 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14655 property that you can choose.
14656 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14659 \begin_inset space ~
14664 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14666 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14672 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14677 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14678 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14679 environments all at once.
14682 \begin_layout Standard
14684 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14686 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14689 properties, and their options (in addition to
14692 \begin_inset space ~
14698 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14702 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14710 \begin_layout Labeling
14711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14725 The possible options are:
14729 \begin_layout Labeling
14730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14735 This is the Roman font family.
14736 Normally a serif font.
14737 It's also the default family.
14747 \begin_layout Labeling
14748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14752 \begin_inset space ~
14759 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14771 \begin_layout Labeling
14772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14779 This is the Typewriter font family.
14785 arg "font-typewriter"
14791 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14795 \begin_layout Standard
14797 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14798 The general differences of these families are:
14801 \begin_layout Itemize
14803 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14808 fonts use characters with serifs.
14809 These are the small
14810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14817 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14818 The following example shows the difference:
14819 \begin_inset Newline newline
14823 \begin_inset Newline newline
14828 text without serifs
14831 \begin_inset Newline newline
14834 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14835 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14842 \begin_layout Itemize
14844 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14849 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14850 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14851 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14854 \begin_layout Itemize
14856 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14869 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14887 \begin_inset Newline newline
14891 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14907 \begin_inset Note Note
14910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14913 For more on phantoms see section
14914 \begin_inset space ~
14918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14920 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14930 \begin_inset Newline newline
14939 \begin_layout Labeling
14940 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14945 This corresponds to the print weight.
14950 \begin_layout Labeling
14951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14956 This is the Medium font series.
14957 It's also the default series.
14960 \begin_layout Labeling
14961 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14968 This is the Bold font series.
14981 \begin_layout Labeling
14982 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14987 As the name implies.
14992 \begin_layout Labeling
14993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14998 This is the Upright font shape.
14999 It's also the default shape.
15002 \begin_layout Labeling
15003 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15013 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15018 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15023 s the Italic font shape
15029 \begin_layout Labeling
15030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15037 This is the Slanted font shape
15039 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15040 , this is different from italic).
15043 \begin_layout Labeling
15044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15048 \begin_inset space ~
15055 This is the Small caps font shape
15062 \begin_layout Labeling
15063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15068 Alters the text color.
15069 Note that not all DVI
15070 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15072 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15075 viewers are able to display colors.
15077 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15081 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15083 \begin_inset space ~
15090 , which means that the document default color set in
15092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15093 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15099 \begin_inset space ~
15105 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15111 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15191 \begin_inset Index idx
15194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15203 \begin_layout Labeling
15204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15209 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15210 the language of the document.
15211 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15212 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15213 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15216 in blue to indicate the change
15217 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15218 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15222 \begin_inset Newline newline
15225 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15227 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15228 When using the spell checking (see section
15229 \begin_inset space ~
15233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15235 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15239 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15240 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15242 \begin_inset Newline newline
15245 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15247 Exclude from Spellchecking
15250 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15253 \begin_layout Labeling
15254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15259 Alters the size of the font.
15261 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15263 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15267 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15270 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15271 document font size.
15272 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15273 the details, but a general description of what
15279 \begin_layout Labeling
15280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15301 arg "font-size tiny"
15307 \begin_layout Labeling
15308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15329 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15335 \begin_layout Labeling
15336 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15357 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15363 \begin_layout Labeling
15364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15385 arg "font-size small"
15391 \begin_layout Labeling
15392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15406 It's also the default size.
15410 arg "font-size normal"
15416 \begin_layout Labeling
15417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15438 arg "font-size large"
15444 \begin_layout Labeling
15445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 arg "font-size larger"
15472 \begin_layout Labeling
15473 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15494 arg "font-size largest"
15500 \begin_layout Labeling
15501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15522 arg "font-size huge"
15528 \begin_layout Labeling
15529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15550 arg "font-size giant"
15556 \begin_layout Labeling
15557 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15562 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15582 arg "font-size increase"
15588 \begin_layout Labeling
15589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15594 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15614 arg "font-size decrease"
15621 \begin_layout Standard
15626 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15627 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15629 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15630 — use those instead.
15631 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15634 \begin_layout Labeling
15635 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15637 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15641 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15647 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15648 change a few other things at the character level
15649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15650 have text passages being underlined
15654 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15655 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15656 days, when you could not change fonts.
15657 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15658 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15659 because some people
15663 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15670 \begin_layout Labeling
15671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15673 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15680 This is text with emphasize on
15683 This might seem like the same as
15687 , but it is actually a bit different.
15693 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15695 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15696 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15700 \begin_layout Labeling
15701 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15703 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15708 Don't use underlining.
15713 \begin_layout Labeling
15714 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15716 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15730 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15739 arg "font-underline"
15745 \begin_inset Newline newline
15749 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15752 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15753 when you could not change fonts.
15754 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15755 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15756 because some people
15760 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15765 \begin_layout Labeling
15766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15770 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15772 \begin_inset space ~
15781 This is text with Double under
15782 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15784 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15793 arg "font-underunderline"
15797 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15799 \begin_inset Newline newline
15802 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15803 about double underbar
15808 \begin_layout Labeling
15809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15813 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15815 \begin_inset space ~
15824 This is text with Wavy under
15825 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15827 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15836 arg "font-underwave"
15840 \begin_inset Newline newline
15843 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15844 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15845 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15850 \begin_layout Labeling
15851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15853 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15858 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15864 \begin_layout Labeling
15865 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15867 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15872 Don't use strikethrough.
15875 \begin_layout Labeling
15876 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15880 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15882 \begin_inset space ~
15886 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15894 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15897 Single strikethrough
15905 arg "font-strikeout"
15909 \begin_inset Newline newline
15912 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15913 changed in the meantime.
15916 \begin_layout Labeling
15917 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15919 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15923 \begin_inset space ~
15927 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15929 \begin_inset space ~
15933 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15941 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15943 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15949 \begin_inset Newline newline
15952 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15956 \begin_layout Standard
15958 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15959 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15960 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15967 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15974 \begin_layout Itemize
15976 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15983 This is text with emphasize on
15988 \begin_layout Itemize
15992 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
15999 This is text with Noun on.
16001 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16008 , this is a logical attribute.
16009 Normally it's equivalent to
16012 \begin_inset space ~
16022 \begin_layout Standard
16023 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16031 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16032 chosen a new character style
16033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16034 applied a text property
16037 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16040 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16042 \begin_inset space ~
16045 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16047 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16053 arg "dialog-show character"
16061 arg "dialog-show character"
16064 ) dialog, the settings are
16065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16069 You can activate the
16070 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16073 last applied properties
16075 by using the toolbar button
16078 arg "textstyle-apply"
16082 The button lets you apply
16083 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16084 your custom character style
16085 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16088 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16090 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16091 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16092 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16093 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16098 \begin_layout Standard
16099 To completely reset the
16100 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16102 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16103 text properties of a selection
16105 to the default, use
16106 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16108 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16118 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16123 from the menu of the toolbar button
16126 arg "textstyle-apply"
16133 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16134 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16135 you just set the shape to
16136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16154 \begin_inset space ~
16168 \begin_layout Standard
16170 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16171 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16179 \begin_inset space ~
16191 \begin_layout Itemize
16193 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16206 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16224 \begin_inset Newline newline
16228 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16242 \begin_inset Note Note
16245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16246 For more on phantoms see section
16247 \begin_inset space ~
16251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16253 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16263 \begin_inset Newline newline
16269 \begin_layout Itemize
16271 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16276 fonts use characters with serifs.
16277 These are the small
16278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16285 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16286 The following example shows the difference:
16287 \begin_inset Newline newline
16291 \begin_inset Newline newline
16296 text without serifs
16299 \begin_inset Newline newline
16302 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16303 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16310 \begin_layout Itemize
16312 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16317 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16318 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16319 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16324 \begin_layout Standard
16326 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16334 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16335 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16338 \begin_inset space ~
16343 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16344 the property to be removed.
16345 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16346 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16347 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16365 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16366 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16374 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16378 \begin_inset space ~
16383 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16394 If you, for example, set
16395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16413 \begin_inset space ~
16418 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16427 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16432 \begin_layout Standard
16434 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16437 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16438 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16441 \begin_layout Section
16442 Printing and Previewing
16445 \begin_layout Subsection
16449 \begin_layout Standard
16450 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16451 using \SpecialChar LyX
16452 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16453 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16454 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16455 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16457 Additional Features
16462 \begin_layout Standard
16464 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16467 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16468 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16469 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16472 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16473 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16474 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16475 to turn your writing into printable output.
16476 This happens in two stages:
16479 \begin_layout Enumerate
16480 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16481 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16483 a file with the extension,
16484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16498 \begin_layout Enumerate
16499 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16500 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16501 to use the commands in the
16505 file to produce printable output.
16508 \begin_layout Subsection
16509 Output file formats
16510 \begin_inset Index idx
16513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16522 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16530 Simple text (ASCII)
16531 \begin_inset Index idx
16534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16535 File formats ! ASCII
16543 \begin_layout Standard
16544 This file type has the extension
16545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16557 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16561 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16568 \begin_layout Standard
16569 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16571 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16572 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16574 \begin_inset space ~
16580 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16581 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16582 bibliography (section
16583 \begin_inset space ~
16587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16589 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16594 If your document includes such material, use
16596 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16597 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16599 \begin_inset space ~
16603 \begin_inset space ~
16607 \begin_inset space ~
16615 \begin_inset space ~
16619 \begin_inset space ~
16625 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16626 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16632 \begin_inset Index idx
16635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16636 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16645 \begin_layout Standard
16646 This file type has the extension
16647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16658 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16661 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16662 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16663 -Errors or to process it manually
16664 with console commands.
16665 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16666 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16667 's temporary directory whenever you
16668 view or export your document.
16671 \begin_layout Standard
16672 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16673 -file using the menu
16675 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16676 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16680 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16681 export variants are explained in section
16682 \begin_inset space ~
16686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16688 reference "subsec:Export"
16695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16697 \begin_inset Index idx
16700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16709 \begin_layout Standard
16710 This file type has the extension
16711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16731 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16732 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16733 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16737 \begin_layout Standard
16738 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16739 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16740 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16741 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16742 when you view the DVI.
16743 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16746 \begin_layout Standard
16747 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16749 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16750 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16755 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16756 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16758 \begin_inset space ~
16764 The latter option uses the program
16766 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16772 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16775 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16776 font access (see section
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16783 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16788 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16789 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16794 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16796 \begin_inset Index idx
16799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16800 File formats ! PostScript
16808 \begin_layout Standard
16809 This file type has the extension
16810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16822 PostScript was developed by the company
16826 as a printer language.
16827 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16829 PostScript can be seen as a
16830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16833 programming language
16834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16837 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16842 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16849 \begin_inset Index idx
16852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16854 packages ! pstricks
16864 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16867 \begin_layout Standard
16868 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16872 Encapsulated PostScript
16873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16876 (EPS, file extension
16877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16889 As \SpecialChar LyX
16890 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16891 convert them in the background to EPS.
16892 If, for example, you have 50
16893 \begin_inset space ~
16896 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16898 \begin_inset space ~
16901 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16902 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16904 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16905 EPS to avoid this problem.
16908 \begin_layout Standard
16909 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16911 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16912 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16920 \begin_inset Index idx
16923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16942 \begin_layout Standard
16943 This file type has the extension
16944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16960 Portable Document Format
16961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16968 was derived from PostScript.
16969 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16978 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16979 looks exactly the same.
16982 \begin_layout Standard
16983 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16987 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16991 (JPG, file extension
16992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17019 Portable Network Graphics
17020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17023 (PNG, file extension
17024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17036 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17037 converts them in the
17038 background to one of these formats.
17039 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17040 will slow down your workflow.
17041 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17044 \begin_layout Standard
17045 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17047 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17053 \begin_layout Description
17055 \begin_inset space ~
17058 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17062 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17065 \begin_layout Description
17067 \begin_inset space ~
17074 ) This uses the program
17076 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17079 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17082 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17085 is a new engine, derived from
17089 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17090 access (see section
17091 \begin_inset space ~
17095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17097 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17102 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17103 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17108 \begin_layout Description
17110 \begin_inset space ~
17117 ) This uses the program
17122 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17128 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17129 font access (see section
17130 \begin_inset space ~
17134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17136 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17141 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17142 vertically written Japanese.
17145 \begin_layout Description
17147 \begin_inset space ~
17150 (cropped) This is the same as
17153 \begin_inset space ~
17158 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17159 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17160 to generate good-looking
17161 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17164 \begin_layout Description
17166 \begin_inset space ~
17169 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17173 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17177 \begin_layout Description
17179 \begin_inset space ~
17182 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17186 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17187 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17191 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17192 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17195 \begin_layout Standard
17199 \begin_inset space ~
17208 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17209 works without problems.
17210 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17211 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17215 \begin_inset space ~
17223 \begin_inset space ~
17228 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17238 \begin_inset Index idx
17241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17242 FileFormats ! XHTML
17248 \begin_inset Index idx
17251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17261 This file type has the extension
17262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17274 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17275 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17276 When \SpecialChar LyX
17277 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17278 suitable for the purpose.
17279 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17281 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17282 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17285 between different formats, which are described in section
17287 Math Output in XHTML
17292 \begin_inset space ~
17300 \begin_layout Standard
17301 XHTML output remains
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17309 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17310 features are supported yet.
17314 and the World Wide Web
17318 Additional Features
17320 manual, for more information.
17323 \begin_layout Standard
17324 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17326 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17327 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17333 \begin_layout Subsection
17335 \begin_inset Index idx
17338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17347 \begin_layout Standard
17348 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17349 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17358 or use the toolbar button
17365 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17366 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17367 \begin_inset space ~
17371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17373 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17377 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17379 \begin_inset space ~
17383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17385 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17390 Further output formats can be selected via
17392 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17393 View (Other Formats)
17395 or the toolbar button
17404 \begin_layout Standard
17405 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17406 viewer window using the menu
17408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17413 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17414 Update (Other Formats)
17419 \begin_layout Standard
17420 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17423 To have a real output, export your document.
17426 \begin_layout Section
17427 A few Words about Typography
17428 \begin_inset Index idx
17431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17440 \begin_layout Subsection
17441 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17442 \begin_inset Index idx
17445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17452 \begin_inset Index idx
17455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17464 \begin_layout Standard
17465 In \SpecialChar LyX
17467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17478 symbol comes in four variants: the
17495 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17501 \begin_layout Standard
17502 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17512 height_special "totalheight"
17517 backgroundcolor "none"
17520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17521 \begin_inset Tabular
17522 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17523 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17524 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17525 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17526 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17527 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17528 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17556 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17557 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17596 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17597 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17619 system key combination
17623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17624 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17636 and the em dash with
17639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17652 is the Mac label for the right
17663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17676 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17677 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17699 system key combination or
17700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17714 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17727 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17766 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17772 \begin_layout Standard
17773 Dashes can also be inserted with
17775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17777 \begin_inset space ~
17780 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17788 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17789 and 2014 for the en dash).
17792 \begin_layout Standard
17793 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17794 mode and has a length of its own.
17795 Here are some examples:
17798 \begin_layout Enumerate
17799 line- and page-breaks
17800 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17810 \begin_layout Enumerate
17812 \begin_inset space ~
17816 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17826 \begin_layout Enumerate
17827 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17828 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17838 \begin_layout Enumerate
17839 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17843 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17853 \begin_layout Standard
17855 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17857 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17858 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17866 \begin_layout Subsection
17867 Dashes and Line Breaks
17868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17870 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17877 \begin_layout Standard
17878 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17879 case and locale, e.
17880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17886 \begin_layout Itemize
17887 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17888 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17891 \begin_layout Itemize
17892 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17896 \begin_layout Itemize
17897 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17898 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17901 \begin_layout Standard
17902 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17903 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17914 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17917 \begin_layout Enumerate
17918 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17919 \begin_inset space ~
17922 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17924 The Elements of Typographic Style
17927 \begin_inset space ~
17930 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17933 \begin_layout Enumerate
17934 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17941 Prevent Hyphenation
17946 \begin_inset space ~
17962 in \SpecialChar TeX
17968 \begin_layout Itemize
17970 \begin_inset space ~
17974 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17984 height_special "totalheight"
17989 backgroundcolor "none"
17992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18001 \begin_layout Itemize
18005 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18015 height_special "totalheight"
18020 backgroundcolor "none"
18023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18027 \begin_inset space ~
18035 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18036 \begin_inset space ~
18039 – sont très utiles.
18042 \begin_layout Itemize
18049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18058 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18062 \begin_layout Standard
18063 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18064 \begin_inset space ~
18067 – in contrast to an overfull line
18068 \begin_inset space ~
18071 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18075 \begin_layout Standard
18076 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18080 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18081 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18082 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18087 \begin_layout Enumerate
18088 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18089 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18090 or \SpecialChar TeX
18096 \begin_layout Itemize
18100 \begin_inset space ~
18103 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18104 \begin_inset space ~
18107 – sont très utiles.
18111 \begin_layout Enumerate
18112 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18113 \begin_inset Newline newline
18118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18119 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18120 Optional line break
18126 \begin_layout Itemize
18127 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18128 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18129 should be followed by
18130 a line break opportunity.
18133 \begin_layout Standard
18134 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18135 \begin_inset space ~
18139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18141 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18152 \begin_layout Enumerate
18153 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18154 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18155 or en dashes (see section
18156 \begin_inset space ~
18160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18162 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18173 Changes and backwards compatibility
18176 \begin_layout Standard
18177 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18179 \begin_inset space ~
18182 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18183 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18192 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18193 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18201 \begin_layout Standard
18202 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18204 \begin_inset space ~
18207 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18209 prevents ligation to dashes.
18211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18218 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18223 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18224 after the input (unless the current text font is
18232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18233 The behavior was changed since
18234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18249 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18250 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18251 as non-breakable dashes.
18252 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18261 \begin_layout Standard
18264 \begin_inset space ~
18272 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18274 \begin_inset space ~
18277 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18281 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18282 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18283 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18285 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18289 If you used both literal and
18290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18297 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18299 \begin_inset space ~
18302 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18303 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18306 \begin_layout Subsection
18308 \begin_inset Index idx
18311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18320 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18327 \begin_layout Standard
18328 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18329 but automatically in the output.
18330 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18336 \begin_inset Index idx
18339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18346 following the rules of the document language.
18348 does not hyphenate text in the
18352 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18355 \begin_layout Standard
18357 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18361 font and with unusual constructs, like
18362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18370 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18371 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18372 This is done with the menu
18374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18375 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18377 \begin_inset space ~
18383 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18385 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18389 \begin_layout Standard
18390 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18391 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18402 would then see the hyphen
18403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18410 as a line break possibility.
18411 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18412 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18416 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18419 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18421 Prevent Hyphenation
18426 \begin_inset space ~
18434 \begin_layout Subsection
18436 \begin_inset Index idx
18439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18449 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18452 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18459 \begin_layout Standard
18460 When \SpecialChar LyX
18461 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18462 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18464 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18470 appropriate amount of space.
18471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18474 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18476 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18477 gets after another word.
18480 \begin_layout Standard
18481 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18482 not work in all cases.
18484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18495 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18496 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18499 \begin_layout Standard
18500 Here are some examples of
18504 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18507 \begin_layout Itemize
18512 \begin_layout Itemize
18517 \begin_layout Standard
18518 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18521 \begin_layout Itemize
18523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18527 this is too much space!
18530 \begin_layout Itemize
18535 \begin_layout Standard
18536 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18539 \begin_layout Standard
18540 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18543 \begin_layout Enumerate
18547 \begin_inset space ~
18552 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18553 \begin_inset space ~
18557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18559 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18564 \begin_inset Index idx
18567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18568 Spaces ! inter-word
18576 \begin_layout Enumerate
18580 \begin_inset space ~
18585 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18586 \begin_inset space ~
18590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18592 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18597 \begin_inset Index idx
18600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18609 \begin_layout Enumerate
18613 \begin_inset space ~
18617 \begin_inset space ~
18621 \begin_inset space ~
18628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18630 \begin_inset space ~
18635 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18636 This function is also bound to
18639 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18645 \begin_layout Standard
18646 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18649 \begin_layout Itemize
18651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18655 \begin_inset space \space{}
18658 this is too much space!
18661 \begin_layout Itemize
18662 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18666 \begin_layout Standard
18667 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18668 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18670 will take care of this.
18673 \begin_layout Standard
18674 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18678 \begin_inset space ~
18684 feature described in the section
18686 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18691 Additional Features
18696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18698 \begin_inset Index idx
18701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18702 Typography ! Quotation marks
18708 \begin_inset Index idx
18711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18712 Quotation marks | see
18716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18742 \begin_layout Standard
18744 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18745 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18746 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18756 The keyboard character,
18760 , generates this automatically.
18763 \begin_layout Standard
18764 You can specify what character the
18768 key produces by using the submenu
18774 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18778 \begin_inset Index idx
18781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18782 Document ! Settings
18787 dialog and switching the
18791 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18792 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18794 \begin_inset space ~
18800 \begin_layout Labeling
18801 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18813 \begin_inset space ~
18817 \begin_inset space ~
18821 \begin_inset Quotes els
18825 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18839 \begin_inset Quotes els
18843 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18846 quotation marks (as common, e.
18847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18853 \begin_layout Labeling
18854 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18857 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18861 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18865 \begin_inset space ~
18869 \begin_inset space ~
18873 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18877 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18883 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18887 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18891 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18895 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18898 quotation marks (as common, e.
18899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18905 \begin_layout Labeling
18906 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18909 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18913 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18917 \begin_inset space ~
18921 \begin_inset space ~
18925 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18929 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18935 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18939 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18943 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18947 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18950 quotation marks (as common, e.
18951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18957 \begin_layout Labeling
18958 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18961 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18965 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18969 \begin_inset space ~
18973 \begin_inset space ~
18977 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18981 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18987 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18991 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18995 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18999 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19002 quotation marks (as common, e.
19003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19009 \begin_layout Labeling
19010 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19013 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19017 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19021 \begin_inset space ~
19025 \begin_inset space ~
19029 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19033 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19039 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19043 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19047 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19051 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19054 quotation marks (as common, e.
19055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19058 g., in Switzerland)
19061 \begin_layout Labeling
19062 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19065 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19069 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19073 \begin_inset space ~
19077 \begin_inset space ~
19081 \begin_inset Quotes als
19085 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19091 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19095 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19099 \begin_inset Quotes als
19103 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19106 quotation marks (as common, e.
19107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19113 \begin_layout Labeling
19114 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19117 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19121 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19125 \begin_inset space ~
19129 \begin_inset space ~
19133 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19137 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19143 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19147 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19151 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19155 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19158 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19161 \begin_layout Labeling
19162 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19165 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19169 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19173 \begin_inset space ~
19177 \begin_inset space ~
19181 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19185 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19191 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19195 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19199 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19203 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19206 quotation marks (as common, e.
19207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19210 g., in Great Britain)
19213 \begin_layout Labeling
19214 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19217 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19221 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19225 \begin_inset space ~
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19233 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19237 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19243 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19247 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19251 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19255 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19258 quotation marks (as common, e.
19259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19265 \begin_layout Labeling
19266 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19269 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19273 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19277 \begin_inset space ~
19281 \begin_inset space ~
19285 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19289 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19295 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19299 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19303 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19307 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19310 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19316 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19317 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19318 the inner marks differ).
19326 \begin_layout Labeling
19327 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19330 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19334 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19338 \begin_inset space ~
19342 \begin_inset space ~
19346 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19350 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19356 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19360 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19364 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19368 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19371 quotation marks (as common, e.
19372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19378 \begin_layout Labeling
19379 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19382 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19386 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19390 \begin_inset space ~
19394 \begin_inset space ~
19398 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19402 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19408 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19412 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19416 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19420 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19423 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19426 \begin_layout Labeling
19427 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19428 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19436 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19442 \begin_inset space ~
19446 \begin_inset space ~
19452 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19460 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19464 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19472 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19476 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19479 quotation marks (as common, e.
19480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19488 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19489 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19497 \begin_layout Labeling
19498 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19499 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19507 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19513 \begin_inset space ~
19517 \begin_inset space ~
19523 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19531 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19535 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19539 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19543 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19547 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19550 quotation marks (as common, e.
19551 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19554 g., in North Korea and China)
19558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19559 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19560 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19568 \begin_layout Standard
19569 Inner quotation marks
19573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19575 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19576 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19584 does not necessarily mean
19585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19593 This is why we call them
19594 \begin_inset Quotes els
19598 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19614 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19616 \begin_inset Quotes els
19620 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19623 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19626 arg "quote-insert inner"
19631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19637 \begin_layout Standard
19638 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19639 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19640 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19641 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19642 If you check the setting
19644 Use dynamic quotation marks
19648 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19649 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19652 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19653 they appear in a special color).
19654 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19655 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19660 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19663 \begin_layout Standard
19664 Individual quotation marks (i.
19665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19668 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19669 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19673 \begin_layout Subsection
19675 \begin_inset Index idx
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19679 Typography ! Ligatures
19685 \begin_inset Index idx
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19719 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19726 \begin_layout Standard
19727 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19728 print them as single characters.
19729 These groups are known as
19734 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19735 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19737 Here are the standard ligatures:
19740 \begin_layout Itemize
19744 \begin_layout Itemize
19748 \begin_layout Itemize
19752 \begin_layout Itemize
19756 \begin_layout Itemize
19760 \begin_layout Standard
19761 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19764 \begin_layout Standard
19765 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19766 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19774 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19790 To break a ligature, use
19792 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19793 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19795 \begin_inset space ~
19802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19813 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19830 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19838 \begin_layout Subsection
19840 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19842 \begin_inset Index idx
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19855 \begin_layout Standard
19858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19859 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19863 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19866 \begin_layout Description
19868 The name of the game.
19871 \begin_layout Description
19873 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19877 \begin_layout Description
19879 The \SpecialChar TeX
19880 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19884 \begin_layout Description
19885 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19886 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19890 \begin_layout Standard
19891 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19897 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19905 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19906 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19907 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19908 converges to the number
19909 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19912 : The actual version is
19913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19921 , the previous one was
19922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19933 \begin_layout Subsection
19935 \begin_inset Index idx
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 \begin_layout Standard
19948 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19949 space between two words.
19950 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19960 for units use the menu
19962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19963 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19965 \begin_inset space ~
19973 arg "space-insert thin"
19979 \begin_layout Standard
19980 Here is an example to show the differences:
19983 \begin_layout Standard
19984 \begin_inset Tabular
19985 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19986 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19987 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19988 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 \begin_inset space ~
19999 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20011 space between number and unit
20018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20027 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 half space between number and unit
20052 \begin_layout Subsection
20054 \begin_inset Index idx
20057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20066 \begin_layout Standard
20067 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20069 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20070 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20071 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20072 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20073 These bits of text became known as
20084 \begin_layout Standard
20085 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20086 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20087 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20088 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20089 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20090 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20091 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20092 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20093 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20094 \begin_inset Newline newline
20102 \begin_inset Newline newline
20110 \begin_inset Newline newline
20113 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20114 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20115 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20117 \begin_inset space ~
20121 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20123 key "latexcompanion"
20129 \begin_inset space ~
20133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20140 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20141 's page break mechanism.
20144 \begin_layout Chapter
20145 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20148 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20155 \begin_layout Standard
20156 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20159 \begin_inset space ~
20165 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20168 \begin_layout Section
20170 \begin_inset Index idx
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20189 \begin_layout Standard
20191 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20194 \begin_layout Description
20197 \begin_inset space ~
20200 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20201 \begin_inset Newline newline
20205 \begin_inset Note Note
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20217 \begin_layout Description
20218 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20219 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20220 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20223 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20224 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20226 \begin_inset space ~
20232 \begin_inset Newline newline
20236 \begin_inset Note Comment
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20249 \begin_layout Description
20251 \begin_inset space ~
20254 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20255 set in the document settings under
20257 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20259 \begin_inset space ~
20265 \begin_inset Newline newline
20269 \begin_inset Newline newline
20273 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20283 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20288 of a comment that appears in the output.
20294 \begin_inset Newline newline
20298 \begin_inset Newline newline
20301 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20304 \begin_layout Standard
20305 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20313 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20317 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20320 \begin_layout Section
20322 \begin_inset Index idx
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20334 name "sec:Footnotes"
20341 \begin_layout Standard
20343 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20349 or the toolbar button
20352 arg "footnote-insert"
20364 \begin_inset Graphics
20365 filename clipart/footnote.png
20374 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20375 's representation of your footnote.
20385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20404 label, the box will
20408 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20409 Clicking on the box label again will close
20422 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20423 and click on the footnote
20438 \begin_layout Standard
20439 Here is an example footnote:
20447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20448 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20456 \begin_layout Standard
20457 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20458 position where the footnote box is placed.
20459 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20460 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20461 according to the document class.
20463 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20464 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20470 ey are described in the
20473 \begin_inset space ~
20481 \begin_layout Section
20483 \begin_inset Index idx
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20495 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20502 \begin_layout Standard
20503 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20505 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20509 \begin_inset space ~
20514 or the toolbar button
20517 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20543 appearing within your text.
20544 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20545 's representation of your margin
20554 \begin_layout Standard
20555 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20559 \begin_inset Marginal
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 This is a marginal note.
20572 \begin_layout Standard
20573 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20574 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20575 pages, right on odd pages.
20578 \begin_layout Standard
20579 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20582 \begin_inset space ~
20590 \begin_inset space ~
20598 \begin_layout Section
20599 Graphics and Images
20600 \begin_inset Index idx
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 \begin_inset Index idx
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20622 name "sec:Graphics"
20629 \begin_layout Standard
20630 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20631 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20634 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20643 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20646 \begin_layout Standard
20647 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20652 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20653 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20655 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20656 \begin_inset space ~
20660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20662 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20669 \begin_layout Standard
20674 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20675 of the image in the output.
20676 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20680 \begin_inset space ~
20684 \begin_inset space ~
20693 \begin_inset space ~
20697 \begin_inset space ~
20701 \begin_inset space ~
20706 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20707 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20715 \begin_layout Standard
20719 \begin_inset space ~
20723 \begin_inset space ~
20728 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20729 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20731 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20736 \begin_inset space ~
20741 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20742 with the image size is printed.
20745 \begin_layout Standard
20746 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20747 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20749 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20752 \begin_layout Standard
20754 \begin_inset Graphics
20755 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20763 \begin_layout Standard
20764 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20765 the image into a float, see section
20766 \begin_inset space ~
20770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20772 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20779 \begin_layout Subsection
20781 \begin_inset Index idx
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20793 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20800 \begin_layout Standard
20801 You can insert images in any known file format.
20802 But as we explained in section
20803 \begin_inset space ~
20807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20809 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20813 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20815 therefore uses the program
20819 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20820 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20821 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20822 \begin_inset space ~
20826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20828 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20835 \begin_layout Standard
20836 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20839 \begin_layout Description
20841 \begin_inset space ~
20844 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20845 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20846 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20850 Graphics Interchange Format
20851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20854 (GIF, file extension
20855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20867 \begin_inset Index idx
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20902 Portable Network Graphics
20903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20906 (PNG, file extension
20907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20919 \begin_inset Index idx
20922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20954 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20958 (JPG, file extension
20959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20983 \begin_inset Index idx
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 \begin_layout Description
21019 \begin_inset space ~
21022 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21024 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21025 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21026 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21027 \begin_inset Newline newline
21030 Scalable image formats can be
21031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21034 Scalable Vector Graphics
21035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21038 (SVG, file extension
21039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21051 \begin_inset Index idx
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21086 Encapsulated PostScript
21087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21090 (EPS, file extension
21091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21103 \begin_inset Index idx
21106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21138 Portable Document Format
21139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21142 (PDF, file extension
21143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21155 \begin_inset Index idx
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21173 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21174 result will not be scalable.
21175 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21189 \begin_layout Standard
21190 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21197 \begin_layout Subsection
21198 Grouping of Image Settings
21199 \begin_inset Index idx
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 Images ! Settings grouping
21211 \begin_layout Standard
21212 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21214 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21215 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21217 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21218 need to manually change each of them.
21222 \begin_layout Standard
21223 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21226 \begin_inset space ~
21230 \begin_inset space ~
21242 \begin_inset space ~
21246 \begin_inset space ~
21252 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21253 and checking the name of the desired group.
21256 \begin_layout Section
21258 \begin_inset Index idx
21261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21277 \begin_layout Standard
21278 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21281 arg "tabular-insert"
21286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21290 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21291 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21292 from the rest of the table.
21293 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21294 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21296 Here is an example table:
21299 \begin_layout Standard
21301 \begin_inset Tabular
21302 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21303 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21304 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21305 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21306 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 \begin_layout Subsection
21511 \begin_layout Standard
21512 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21515 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21519 This brings up the table dialog.
21520 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21521 cursor is placed currently.
21522 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21523 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21524 done on all of your selection.
21527 \begin_layout Standard
21528 In addition to the table dialog, the
21531 \begin_inset space ~
21536 helps you in setting table properties.
21537 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21540 \begin_layout Standard
21544 \begin_inset space ~
21549 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21550 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21551 current cell respectively.
21552 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21554 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21555 of text, see section
21556 \begin_inset space ~
21560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21562 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21569 \begin_layout Standard
21570 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21571 using the check box
21580 This will merge the cells to
21584 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21585 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21586 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21587 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21588 in the last row without the upper border:
21591 \begin_layout Standard
21593 \begin_inset Tabular
21594 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21595 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21596 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21597 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21598 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21599 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21610 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21619 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21695 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21730 \begin_layout Standard
21731 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21732 -arguments for the table.
21733 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21734 explained in the chapter
21741 \begin_inset space ~
21747 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21748 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21749 but are visible in the output.
21752 \begin_layout Standard
21753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21761 Most DVI-viewers are
21765 able to display rotations.
21773 \begin_layout Standard
21778 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21783 adds lines for all cell borders.
21786 \begin_layout Subsection
21788 \begin_inset Index idx
21791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21792 Tables ! Multi-page
21798 \begin_inset Index idx
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 \begin_layout Standard
21811 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21814 \begin_inset space ~
21818 \begin_inset space ~
21826 \begin_inset space ~
21831 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21832 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21835 \begin_layout Description
21840 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21841 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21842 Except for the first page, if
21845 \begin_inset space ~
21853 \begin_layout Description
21857 \begin_inset space ~
21862 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21863 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21866 \begin_layout Description
21871 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21872 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21873 except for the last page, if
21876 \begin_inset space ~
21884 \begin_layout Description
21888 \begin_inset space ~
21893 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21894 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21897 \begin_layout Description
21898 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21899 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21905 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21908 \begin_inset space ~
21916 \begin_layout Standard
21917 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21918 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21919 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21925 In this context, first means first in this order:
21928 \begin_inset space ~
21940 \begin_inset space ~
21945 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21948 \begin_layout Standard
21950 \begin_inset Tabular
21951 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21952 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21953 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21954 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21955 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21956 <row endfirsthead="true">
21957 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21968 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21977 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21987 <row endfirsthead="true">
21988 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21999 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 <row endhead="true">
22021 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22041 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 <row endhead="true">
22052 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22072 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22084 <row endfoot="true">
22085 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23137 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23199 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24066 <row endlastfoot="true">
24067 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24104 \begin_layout Subsection
24106 \begin_inset Index idx
24109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24118 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24125 \begin_layout Standard
24126 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24127 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24128 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24129 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24133 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24136 \begin_layout Standard
24137 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24138 for the column in the table dialog.
24139 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24140 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24144 \begin_layout Standard
24146 \begin_inset Tabular
24147 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24148 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24149 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24150 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24151 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 This is longer now.
24301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24352 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24353 This is longer now.
24358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24384 \begin_layout Standard
24385 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24386 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24391 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24392 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24398 Selection with the mouse or with
24402 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24403 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24404 the selection from outside the table.
24407 \begin_layout Section
24409 \begin_inset Index idx
24412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24428 \begin_layout Subsection
24432 \begin_layout Standard
24433 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24434 have a fixed location.
24436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24443 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24451 \begin_inset space ~
24456 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24457 too many notes on the current page.
24460 \begin_layout Standard
24461 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24462 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24463 and pages without text.
24464 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24465 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24466 Floats are therefore numbered.
24467 Referencing is described in section
24468 \begin_inset space ~
24472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24474 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24481 \begin_layout Standard
24482 To insert a float, use the menu
24484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24488 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24489 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24491 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24492 \begin_inset Index idx
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24502 paragraph within the float.
24503 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24504 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24505 left-clicking on the box label.
24506 A closed float box looks like this:
24507 \begin_inset Graphics
24508 filename clipart/float.png
24513 – a gray button with a red label.
24516 \begin_layout Standard
24517 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24519 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24522 \begin_layout Subsection
24524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24526 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24531 \begin_inset Index idx
24534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24535 Floats ! Figure floats
24543 \begin_layout Standard
24545 \begin_inset space ~
24549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24551 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24555 was created using the menu
24557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24558 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24564 arg "float-insert figure"
24568 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24577 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24581 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24582 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24584 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24586 \begin_inset space ~
24594 arg "layout-paragraph"
24600 \begin_layout Standard
24601 \begin_inset Float figure
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24610 \begin_inset Graphics
24611 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24621 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24626 name "fig:A-star-in"
24643 \begin_layout Standard
24644 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24645 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24647 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24656 ) and refer to it using the menu
24658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24664 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24668 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24669 vague references like
24670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24677 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24678 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24688 For more about cross-references, see section
24689 \begin_inset space ~
24693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24695 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24702 \begin_layout Standard
24703 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24704 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24705 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24706 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24707 as described in section
24708 \begin_inset space ~
24712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24714 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24720 \begin_inset space ~
24724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24726 reference "fig:Two-images"
24730 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24731 You can also set the images one below the other.
24733 \begin_inset space ~
24737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24739 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24746 reference "fig:Star"
24750 are the subfigures.
24753 \begin_layout Standard
24754 \begin_inset Float figure
24761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24766 \begin_inset Float figure
24773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24774 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24779 name "fig:Undefinable"
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 \begin_inset Graphics
24793 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24805 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24809 \begin_inset Float figure
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24817 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24835 \begin_inset Graphics
24836 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24848 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24860 name "fig:Two-images"
24877 \begin_layout Subsection
24879 \begin_inset Index idx
24882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24883 Floats ! Table floats
24891 \begin_layout Standard
24892 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24895 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24898 or the toolbar button
24901 arg "float-insert table"
24905 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24906 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24907 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24909 \begin_inset space ~
24913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24915 reference "tab:Table-float"
24922 \begin_layout Standard
24923 \begin_inset Float table
24930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24931 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24936 name "tab:Table-float"
24948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24950 \begin_inset Tabular
24951 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24952 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24953 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24955 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25082 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25103 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25106 \end{array}\right]$
25114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25127 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25148 \begin_layout Subsection
25150 \begin_inset Index idx
25153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 \begin_layout Standard
25164 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25165 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25166 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25168 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25176 \begin_inset space ~
25184 \begin_layout Section
25186 \begin_inset Index idx
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25198 \begin_layout Standard
25200 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25202 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25203 \begin_inset space \space{}
25210 \begin_layout Standard
25211 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25212 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25218 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25219 and its alignment within the page.
25222 \begin_layout Standard
25224 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25234 height_special "totalheight"
25239 backgroundcolor "none"
25242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25245 This is a minipage.
25246 The text is set in an italic style.
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25252 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25253 another formatting.
25261 \begin_layout Standard
25262 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25265 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25269 as described in section
25270 \begin_inset space ~
25274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25276 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25281 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25287 \begin_layout Standard
25288 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25298 height_special "totalheight"
25303 backgroundcolor "none"
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25307 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25308 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25314 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25318 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25328 height_special "totalheight"
25333 backgroundcolor "none"
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25337 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25338 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25346 \begin_layout Standard
25347 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25353 \begin_layout Standard
25354 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25356 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25363 \begin_inset space ~
25371 \begin_layout Chapter
25372 Mathematical Formulas
25373 \begin_inset Index idx
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 \begin_inset Index idx
25386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25417 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25424 \begin_layout Standard
25425 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25430 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25433 \begin_layout Section
25435 \begin_inset Index idx
25438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_layout Standard
25448 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25461 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25463 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25464 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25465 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25467 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25473 \begin_layout Standard
25474 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25478 \begin_inset space ~
25483 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25486 \begin_layout Standard
25487 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25488 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25491 \begin_layout Standard
25492 This is a line with an inline formula
25493 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25499 \begin_layout Standard
25500 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25501 paragraph, like this one:
25502 \begin_inset Formula
25509 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25512 \begin_layout Standard
25514 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25516 For example, typing
25517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25530 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25531 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25535 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25538 \begin_inset space ~
25546 \begin_layout Subsection
25547 Navigating in Formulas
25548 \begin_inset Index idx
25551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25560 \begin_layout Standard
25561 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25562 achieved with the arrow keys.
25564 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25565 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25570 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25571 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25575 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25579 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25582 \end{array}\right]$
25590 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25595 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25596 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25599 \begin_layout Standard
25604 , printed in this document as
25605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25609 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25616 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25617 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25618 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25623 For example, if you want
25624 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25632 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25642 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25646 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25651 , since in the latter case only the
25654 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25659 will be under the square root sign:
25660 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25666 \begin_layout Standard
25667 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25669 \begin_inset Formula
25671 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25680 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25681 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25684 \begin_layout Subsection
25688 \begin_layout Standard
25689 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25690 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25694 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25695 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25696 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25697 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25698 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25702 \begin_layout Subsection
25703 Exponents and Subscripts
25704 \begin_inset Index idx
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25714 \begin_inset Index idx
25717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25726 \begin_layout Standard
25727 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25730 arg "math-superscript"
25736 arg "math-subscript"
25739 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25741 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25744 , type in a formula
25747 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25757 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25763 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25767 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25773 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25779 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25788 , you have to use an extra
25792 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25793 For example, if you want
25794 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25800 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25806 Subscripts are similar: To get
25807 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25813 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25821 \begin_layout Subsection
25823 \begin_inset Index idx
25826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25835 \begin_layout Standard
25836 Create a fraction either with the command
25842 or by using the icon
25845 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25851 \begin_inset space ~
25857 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25858 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25859 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25864 To move back up, press
25869 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25870 \begin_inset Formula
25872 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25875 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25883 \begin_layout Subsection
25885 \begin_inset Index idx
25888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25897 \begin_layout Standard
25898 Roots can be created using the
25901 \begin_inset space ~
25909 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25915 arg "math-insert \\root"
25937 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25943 always produces a square root.
25946 \begin_layout Subsection
25947 Operators with Limits
25948 \begin_inset Index idx
25951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25958 \begin_inset Index idx
25961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25970 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25977 \begin_layout Standard
25979 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25983 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25986 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25987 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25988 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25989 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25990 The sum operator will automatically place its
25991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25998 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26000 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26004 \begin_inset Formula
26006 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26011 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26015 \begin_layout Standard
26016 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26018 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26019 behind the operator and using the menu
26021 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26022 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26024 \begin_inset space ~
26028 \begin_inset space ~
26042 \begin_layout Standard
26043 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26052 \begin_inset Index idx
26055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26062 \begin_inset Formula
26064 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26069 which will place the
26070 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26082 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26083 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26089 \begin_layout Standard
26090 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26097 Have a look at section
26098 \begin_inset space ~
26102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26104 reference "subsec:Functions"
26108 for an explanation of function macros.
26111 \begin_layout Subsection
26113 \begin_inset Index idx
26116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26125 \begin_layout Standard
26126 Most math symbols can be found in the
26129 \begin_inset space ~
26134 under one of several categories; including
26151 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26155 \begin_layout Standard
26156 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26157 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26158 don't have to use the
26161 \begin_inset space ~
26166 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26168 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26171 \begin_layout Subsection
26173 \begin_inset Index idx
26176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26185 \begin_layout Standard
26186 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26192 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26198 \begin_inset space ~
26206 arg "math-insert \\space"
26210 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26211 For example, the sequence
26216 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26219 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26221 \begin_inset Graphics
26222 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26227 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26228 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26229 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26230 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26231 , because they are negative
26233 Here are two examples:
26236 \begin_layout Standard
26246 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26252 \begin_layout Standard
26262 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26268 \begin_layout Subsection
26270 \begin_inset Index idx
26273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26282 name "subsec:Functions"
26289 \begin_layout Standard
26293 \begin_inset space ~
26298 contains under the button
26301 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26304 a number of function macros, such as
26305 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26309 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26317 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26324 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26325 avoid confusions, because
26326 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26330 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26336 \begin_layout Standard
26337 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26339 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26343 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26349 \begin_layout Standard
26350 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26351 are placed, as described in section
26352 \begin_inset space ~
26356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26358 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26365 \begin_layout Subsection
26367 \begin_inset Index idx
26370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26379 \begin_layout Standard
26380 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26382 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26383 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26384 commands, for example, to enter
26385 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26388 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26389 Our example is entered by typing
26394 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26401 \begin_inset space ~
26405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26407 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26411 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26414 \begin_layout Standard
26415 \begin_inset Float table
26422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26423 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26428 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26432 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26442 \begin_inset Tabular
26443 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26444 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26445 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26446 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26531 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26585 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26639 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26693 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26747 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26801 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26855 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26909 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26963 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27008 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27029 \begin_layout Standard
27030 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27033 \begin_inset space ~
27041 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27044 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27048 \begin_layout Section
27049 Brackets and Delimiters
27050 \begin_inset Index idx
27053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27060 \begin_inset Index idx
27063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27072 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27079 \begin_layout Standard
27080 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27082 For some purposes, using just the keys
27087 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27088 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27089 toolbar delimiter icon
27092 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27096 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27097 \begin_inset Formula
27099 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27107 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27108 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27112 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27115 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27121 \begin_inset Formula
27123 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27131 \begin_layout Standard
27132 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27133 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27137 \begin_layout Standard
27138 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27139 left side and right side.
27140 If you use the option
27143 \begin_inset space ~
27148 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27149 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27151 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27156 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27157 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27160 \begin_layout Standard
27161 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27162 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27163 is to go inside the brackets.
27164 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27169 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27170 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27171 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27175 arg "math-delim ( )"
27181 \begin_layout Section
27182 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27183 \begin_inset Index idx
27186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27193 \begin_inset Index idx
27196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27203 \begin_inset Index idx
27206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27207 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27215 \begin_layout Standard
27216 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27220 \begin_inset space ~
27228 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27232 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27233 Here is an example:
27234 \begin_inset Formula
27236 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27245 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27246 \begin_inset space ~
27250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27252 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27257 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27258 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27259 This alignment is set in the box
27264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27313 for every column as default.
27314 For example, the sequence
27315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27326 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27327 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27328 corresponds to the relevant column.
27329 The result will look like this:
27330 \begin_inset Formula
27333 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27334 column & has & has\,right\\
27335 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27344 \begin_layout Standard
27345 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27348 arg "newline-insert newline"
27351 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27352 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27354 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27357 or the math toolbar.
27360 \begin_layout Standard
27361 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27362 It can be created with the menu
27364 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27365 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27367 \begin_inset space ~
27379 Here is an example:
27380 \begin_inset Formula
27394 \begin_layout Standard
27395 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27398 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27401 arg "newline-insert newline"
27405 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27410 arg "newline-insert newline"
27413 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27421 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27422 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27423 A new row is created by every further entry of
27426 arg "newline-insert newline"
27430 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27431 Here is an example:
27432 \begin_inset Formula
27434 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27435 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27440 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27441 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27442 \begin_inset Formula
27444 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27452 \begin_layout Standard
27453 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27460 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27461 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27464 reference "eq:asquared"
27469 The other types are described in section
27470 \begin_inset space ~
27474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27476 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27483 \begin_layout Section
27484 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27485 \begin_inset Index idx
27488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27489 Math ! Formula numbering
27495 \begin_inset Index idx
27498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27499 Math ! Referencing formulas
27505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27507 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27514 \begin_layout Standard
27515 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27518 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27520 \begin_inset space ~
27524 \begin_inset space ~
27532 arg "math-number-toggle"
27536 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27537 within parentheses.
27538 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27539 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27540 the document class.
27541 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27542 separated by a dot:
27543 \begin_inset Formula
27553 arg "math-number-toggle"
27556 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27557 You can only number displayed formulas.
27560 \begin_layout Standard
27561 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27563 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27564 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27566 \begin_inset space ~
27570 \begin_inset space ~
27578 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27581 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27582 \begin_inset Formula
27585 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27591 To number all lines use the shortcut
27594 arg "math-number-toggle"
27600 \begin_layout Standard
27601 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27604 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27605 A label is inserted with the menu
27607 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27616 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27617 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27618 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27630 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27631 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27632 We inserted in the following example the label
27633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27640 in the second line:
27641 \begin_inset Formula
27643 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27644 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27649 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27650 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27651 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27653 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27655 \begin_inset space ~
27663 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27667 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27668 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27669 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27670 as the formula number:
27673 \begin_layout Standard
27674 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27677 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27684 \begin_layout Standard
27685 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27686 's cross-reference box are described in section
27687 \begin_inset space ~
27691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27693 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27698 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27706 \begin_layout Section
27707 User defined math macros
27708 \begin_inset Index idx
27711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27720 \begin_layout Standard
27722 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27723 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27724 Math macros are explained in section
27727 \begin_inset space ~
27739 \begin_layout Section
27743 \begin_layout Subsection
27745 \begin_inset Index idx
27748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27757 \begin_layout Standard
27758 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27759 To set a font in a formula, use the
27762 \begin_inset space ~
27770 arg "math-insert \\font"
27773 , or enter its command, listed in table
27774 \begin_inset space ~
27778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27780 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27787 \begin_layout Standard
27788 \begin_inset Float table
27795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27796 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27801 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27805 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27815 \begin_inset Tabular
27816 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27817 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27851 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27878 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27905 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27965 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27992 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28026 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28053 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28087 \begin_layout Standard
28088 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28096 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28112 \begin_layout Standard
28113 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28114 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28119 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28120 space when you need a space in the box.
28121 Here is an example where
28122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28133 denotes the set of numbers:
28134 \begin_inset Formula
28136 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28144 \begin_layout Standard
28145 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28146 You can, for example, put a character in
28155 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28159 \begin_inset Newline newline
28162 So it is better not to use this feature.
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28167 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28171 \begin_inset Newline newline
28174 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28180 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28181 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28187 \begin_layout Standard
28194 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28197 \begin_layout Standard
28198 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28200 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28201 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28203 \begin_inset space ~
28211 \begin_layout Subsection
28213 \begin_inset Index idx
28216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28225 \begin_layout Standard
28226 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28228 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28232 \begin_inset space ~
28236 \begin_inset space ~
28244 \begin_inset space ~
28252 arg "math-insert \\font"
28256 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28257 in black instead of blue.
28258 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28259 Here is an example:
28260 \begin_inset Formula
28263 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28264 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28273 \begin_layout Subsection
28275 \begin_inset Index idx
28278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28288 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28289 automatically chosen in most situations.
28307 For most characters,
28315 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28316 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28321 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28322 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28323 thinks are appropriate.
28324 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28327 arg "math-insert \\style"
28331 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28332 For example, you can set
28333 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28336 , which is normally in
28345 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28349 The four styles are used in the following example:
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28357 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28361 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28365 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28371 \begin_layout Standard
28372 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28373 is set in a particular size with the menu
28375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28377 \begin_inset space ~
28382 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28383 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28384 will be adjusted to correspond.
28385 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28396 \begin_layout Standard
28400 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28406 \begin_layout Section
28407 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28409 \begin_inset Index idx
28412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28419 \begin_inset Index idx
28422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28431 \begin_layout Standard
28433 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28434 that are in common use.
28437 \begin_layout Subsection
28438 Enabling AMS-Support
28441 \begin_layout Standard
28442 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28443 the document by selecting the checkbox
28446 \begin_inset space ~
28450 \begin_inset space ~
28454 \begin_inset space ~
28461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28465 \begin_inset Index idx
28468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28469 Document ! Settings
28477 \begin_inset space ~
28483 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28484 -errors in formulas,
28485 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28488 \begin_layout Subsection
28490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28492 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28497 \begin_inset Index idx
28500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28501 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28509 \begin_layout Standard
28510 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28511 provides a selection of different formula types.
28513 allows you to choose between
28534 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28535 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28542 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28545 \begin_layout Chapter
28549 \begin_layout Section
28551 \begin_inset Index idx
28554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28563 name "sec:Cross-References"
28570 \begin_layout Standard
28571 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28572 's strengths is cross-references.
28573 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28575 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28576 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28577 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28580 \begin_layout Enumerate
28584 \begin_layout Enumerate
28585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28587 name "enu:Second-item"
28594 \begin_layout Enumerate
28598 \begin_layout Standard
28599 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28604 or by pressing the toolbar button
28611 A gray label box like this:
28612 \begin_inset Graphics
28613 filename clipart/label.png
28617 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28619 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28654 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28655 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28671 \begin_layout Standard
28672 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28677 or the toolbar button
28680 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28684 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28685 \begin_inset Graphics
28686 filename clipart/reference.png
28690 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28692 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28705 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28709 \begin_layout Standard
28710 As an alternative to
28712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28715 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28720 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28721 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28723 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28735 \begin_layout Standard
28736 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28737 \begin_inset space ~
28741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28743 reference "enu:Second-item"
28750 \begin_layout Standard
28751 It is recommended to use a protected space
28755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28756 described in section
28757 \begin_inset space ~
28761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28763 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28772 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28773 line breaks between them.
28776 \begin_layout Standard
28777 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28780 \begin_layout Description
28781 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28784 reference "fig:Two-images"
28791 \begin_layout Description
28792 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28793 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28805 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28812 \begin_layout Description
28813 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28814 \begin_inset space ~
28818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28819 LatexCommand pageref
28820 reference "fig:Two-images"
28827 \begin_layout Description
28829 \begin_inset space ~
28833 \begin_inset space ~
28836 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28838 LatexCommand vpageref
28839 reference "fig:Two-images"
28844 \begin_inset Newline newline
28847 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28848 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28849 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28850 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28851 it prints “on the next page”.
28852 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28855 \begin_layout Description
28857 \begin_inset space ~
28861 \begin_inset space ~
28865 \begin_inset space ~
28868 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28871 reference "fig:Two-images"
28876 \begin_inset Newline newline
28879 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28885 ; otherwise it behaves like
28889 \begin_inset space ~
28893 \begin_inset space ~
28902 \begin_layout Description
28904 \begin_inset space ~
28907 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28908 \begin_inset Newline newline
28912 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28920 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28930 \begin_inset Index idx
28933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28935 packages ! prettyref
28941 \begin_inset Index idx
28944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28946 packages ! refstyle
28957 \begin_inset Newline newline
28960 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28961 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28964 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28969 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28977 is the default and preferred because
28981 supports only English documents.
28982 The format is specified by using the command
28994 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28995 preamble of the document.
28996 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29014 \begin_inset Newline newline
29021 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29026 \begin_inset Newline newline
29037 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29038 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29040 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29041 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29046 , you might do so as follows:
29047 \begin_inset Newline newline
29054 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29059 \begin_inset Newline newline
29062 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29063 the package documentation
29064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29066 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29072 \begin_inset Newline newline
29083 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29090 \begin_layout Description
29092 \begin_inset space ~
29095 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29097 LatexCommand nameref
29098 reference "fig:Two-images"
29105 \begin_layout Description
29107 \begin_inset space ~
29110 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29111 label for the reference:
29112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29113 LatexCommand labelonly
29114 reference "fig:Two-images"
29119 \begin_inset Newline newline
29122 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29123 Code, if you want to issue a command
29124 that \SpecialChar LyX
29130 , then you may want to use the
29133 \begin_inset space ~
29138 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29148 This is the form needed for e.
29149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29153 \begin_inset space \space{}
29160 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29161 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29163 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29167 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29171 \begin_layout Standard
29172 You can only use the style
29176 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29180 is always possible.
29183 \begin_layout Standard
29184 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29185 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29187 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29188 \begin_inset space ~
29192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29194 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29201 \begin_layout Standard
29202 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29206 \begin_inset space ~
29210 \begin_inset space ~
29215 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29216 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29219 \begin_inset space ~
29224 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29225 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29228 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29234 \begin_layout Standard
29235 You can change labels at any time.
29236 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29237 do not need to think about this.
29240 \begin_layout Standard
29241 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29243 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29247 \begin_layout Standard
29248 References are described in detail in the section
29249 \begin_inset space ~
29259 \begin_inset space ~
29267 \begin_layout Section
29268 Table of Contents and other Listings
29269 \begin_inset Index idx
29272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29279 \begin_inset Index idx
29282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29283 Navigating ! Outline
29289 \begin_inset Index idx
29292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29308 \begin_layout Subsection
29310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29312 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29320 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29322 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29323 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29325 \begin_inset space ~
29329 \begin_inset space ~
29335 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29337 If you click on it, the
29341 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29342 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29343 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29345 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29347 \begin_inset space ~
29352 that is described in section
29353 \begin_inset space ~
29357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29359 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29366 \begin_layout Standard
29367 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29368 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29370 \begin_inset space ~
29374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29376 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29380 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29382 \begin_inset space ~
29386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29388 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29392 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29394 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29397 \begin_layout Subsection
29398 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29401 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29408 \begin_layout Standard
29409 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29411 You can insert them via the
29413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29417 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29420 \begin_layout Section
29421 URLs and Hyperlinks
29422 \begin_inset Index idx
29425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29432 \begin_inset Index idx
29435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29444 \begin_layout Subsection
29446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29455 \begin_layout Standard
29456 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29464 \begin_layout Standard
29465 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29467 \begin_inset Flex URL
29470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29472 https://www.lyx.org
29480 \begin_layout Standard
29481 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29487 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29491 \begin_layout Standard
29492 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29500 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29509 \begin_layout Subsection
29511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29513 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29520 \begin_layout Standard
29521 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29526 or with the toolbar button
29533 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29542 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29543 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29544 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29546 name "LyX's homepage"
29547 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29552 , an Email address like this:
29553 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29555 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29556 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29562 , or a link to a file.
29567 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29575 \begin_layout Standard
29576 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29589 to the link target.
29592 \begin_layout Standard
29593 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29594 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29595 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29596 the text style dialog.
29597 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29601 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29603 name "LyX's homepage"
29604 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29612 \begin_layout Standard
29613 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29617 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29620 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29624 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29626 \begin_inset Newline newline
29634 \begin_inset Newline newline
29641 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29644 \begin_layout Section
29646 \begin_inset Index idx
29649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29658 name "sec:Appendices"
29665 \begin_layout Standard
29666 Appendices are created with the menu
29668 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29670 \begin_inset space ~
29674 \begin_inset space ~
29680 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29681 as the appendix part of the book.
29682 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29685 \begin_layout Standard
29686 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29687 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29688 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29689 and the subsection number.
29690 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29694 \begin_layout Standard
29696 \begin_inset space ~
29700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29702 reference "chap:Credits"
29707 \begin_inset space ~
29711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29713 reference "subsec:Export"
29720 \begin_layout Section
29722 \begin_inset Index idx
29725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29734 name "sec:Bibliography"
29741 \begin_layout Standard
29742 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29744 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29745 \begin_inset space ~
29749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29751 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29758 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29763 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29764 \begin_inset space ~
29768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29770 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29775 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29776 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29777 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29781 using a bibliography database.
29784 \begin_layout Standard
29785 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29786 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29790 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29791 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29792 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29793 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29794 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29797 \begin_layout Subsection
29798 The Bibliography Environment
29799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29801 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29808 \begin_layout Standard
29813 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29815 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29824 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29826 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29827 of ASCII characters only.
29831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29836 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29842 \begin_inset Newline newline
29846 \begin_inset Flex URL
29849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29851 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29861 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29871 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29872 \begin_inset Newline newline
29879 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29880 the number of the entry.
29885 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29894 \begin_layout Standard
29895 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29900 or the toolbar button
29903 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29907 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29908 containing the available citations.
29909 Select one or more keys from the list and
29919 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29920 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29924 \begin_layout Standard
29925 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29926 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29927 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29939 \begin_layout Standard
29943 Companion Second Edition
29946 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29948 key "latexcompanion"
29956 \begin_layout Standard
29957 The \SpecialChar LyX
29958 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29959 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29969 \begin_layout Standard
29970 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29977 \begin_inset Index idx
29980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29988 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30000 Author A and Author B(Year)
30001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30008 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30010 Then, if you select
30013 \begin_inset space ~
30018 in the document settings
30019 \begin_inset Index idx
30022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30023 Document ! Settings
30030 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30032 \begin_inset space ~
30038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30040 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30047 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
30050 \begin_layout Standard
30051 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30054 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30056 \begin_inset space ~
30064 arg "layout-paragraph"
30068 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30071 \begin_layout Subsection
30072 Bibliography databases
30073 \begin_inset Index idx
30076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30077 Bibliography ! Databases
30083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30085 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30092 \begin_layout Standard
30093 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30099 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30101 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30102 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30107 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30109 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30110 your working field in a database.
30111 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30112 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30113 list for that document.
30114 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30118 \begin_layout Standard
30119 The database is a text file with the file extension
30120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30131 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30132 The format is explained in
30133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30140 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30142 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30144 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30150 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30151 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30152 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30154 \begin_inset Flex URL
30157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30159 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30167 \begin_layout Standard
30169 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30170 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30171 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30173 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30175 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30176 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30177 Those are addressed by
30182 \begin_inset Index idx
30185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30187 packages ! biblatex
30193 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30194 (although it has been significantly
30195 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30205 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30206 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30207 might conversely fail to correctly
30208 handle databases that use specific
30217 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30221 \begin_layout Standard
30222 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30227 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30233 \begin_inset Index idx
30236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30237 Document ! Settings
30249 \begin_inset space ~
30254 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30262 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30263 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30265 \begin_inset Index idx
30268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30269 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30278 \begin_layout Standard
30279 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30282 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30287 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30289 \begin_inset space ~
30295 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30296 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30304 Add bibliography to TOC
30306 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30311 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30312 in the document or just the cited references.
30314 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30319 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30320 differ from the encoding of the document.
30325 \begin_layout Standard
30326 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30327 style file is a text file with the file extension
30328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30339 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30340 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30341 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30342 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30344 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30350 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30351 \begin_inset Newline newline
30355 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30357 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30367 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30372 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30376 \begin_layout Standard
30377 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30382 \begin_inset Index idx
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30386 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30392 \begin_inset Index idx
30395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30397 packages ! biblatex
30405 \begin_layout Standard
30406 Accessing a database via
30410 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30418 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30420 \begin_inset space ~
30426 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30427 you cannot select a
30432 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30436 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30439 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30440 As for the styles, note the following.
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30450 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30463 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30464 file (text file with the file extension
30465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30476 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30477 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30479 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30483 \begin_layout Standard
30488 styles are not set in the
30491 \begin_inset space ~
30496 dialog, but in the document settings.
30497 \begin_inset Index idx
30500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30501 Document ! Settings
30506 However, in the dialog in the
30510 field, which is only visible if you use
30514 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30515 example how its heading will appear).
30516 These options are described in detail in the
30521 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30531 \begin_layout Standard
30532 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30533 \begin_inset space ~
30537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30539 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30549 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30550 Bibliography Processors
30553 \begin_layout Standard
30554 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30555 uses a bibliography processor,
30556 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30557 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30558 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30560 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30561 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30564 \begin_layout Standard
30565 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30567 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30568 You can do this on a general level in
30570 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30571 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30572 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30575 or for individual documents in
30577 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30578 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30582 The following variants are available by default:
30585 \begin_layout Description
30586 biber a specific, modern processor
30587 \begin_inset Index idx
30590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30597 developed exclusively for
30601 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30607 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30612 makes use of; if you use the
30616 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30623 \begin_layout Description
30624 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30625 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30626 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30630 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30633 \begin_layout Description
30634 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30635 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30639 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30643 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30647 features are supported.
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30651 By default (with the
30657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30658 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30671 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30672 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30673 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30676 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30677 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30690 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30691 -based bibliography styles).
30692 This should suit most needs.
30695 \begin_layout Standard
30696 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30697 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30698 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30703 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30704 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30705 You can adjust it in
30707 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30708 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30709 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30715 \begin_layout Standard
30716 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30717 can add below the selection.
30718 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30719 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30725 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30739 \begin_layout Standard
30741 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30743 These are explained in detail in section
30745 Customizing Bibliographies
30749 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30754 Additional Features
30759 \begin_layout Subsection
30761 \begin_inset Index idx
30764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30765 Bibliography ! Citation format
30771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30773 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30780 \begin_layout Standard
30781 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30786 \begin_inset space \space{}
30789 numerical citation (as
30790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30797 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30805 ) or author-year citations (as
30806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30815 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30819 \begin_layout Standard
30820 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30823 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30824 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30828 \begin_inset Index idx
30831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30832 Document ! Settings
30837 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30843 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30844 labels, is there to use
30847 \begin_inset space ~
30858 \begin_inset space ~
30863 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30866 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30873 \begin_layout Standard
30874 With a bibliography database (see
30875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30877 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30884 ) one has in contrary to the
30888 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30889 These style formats are available:
30892 \begin_layout Description
30894 \begin_inset space ~
30897 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30898 -based approached without any additional packages
30899 (simple numeric citations).
30902 \begin_layout Description
30903 Biblatex loads the package
30908 \begin_inset Index idx
30911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 packages ! biblatex
30918 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30920 Biblatex citation style
30924 Biblatex bibliography style
30927 Options to the package
30931 can be entered in the
30938 \begin_layout Description
30940 \begin_inset space ~
30944 \begin_inset space ~
30947 mode) loads the package
30951 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30952 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30964 behavior very closely.
30969 this option has some additional styles.
30974 styles are also supported by this variant.
30977 \begin_layout Description
30979 \begin_inset space ~
30982 (BibTeX) loads the package
30987 \begin_inset Index idx
30990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30997 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31000 \begin_layout Description
31002 \begin_inset space ~
31005 (BibTeX) loads the package
31010 \begin_inset Index idx
31013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31020 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31023 \begin_layout Standard
31032 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31034 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31043 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31045 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31046 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31048 Biblatex citation style
31051 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31057 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31061 \begin_layout Standard
31062 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31063 are available in the
31068 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31069 a name prefix such as
31070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31085 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31090 \begin_inset space \space{}
31094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31105 \begin_layout Standard
31106 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31112 \begin_inset space \space{}
31115 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31121 \begin_inset space \space{}
31125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31137 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31141 \begin_inset space ~
31149 \begin_inset space ~
31155 Here is a simple example where the text
31156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31160 \begin_inset space ~
31164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31167 appears after the reference:
31170 \begin_layout Quote
31172 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31175 key "latexcompanion"
31183 \begin_layout Standard
31184 All styles except for
31188 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31198 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31202 \begin_layout Standard
31203 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31204 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31205 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31210 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31211 multi-citation (so-called
31212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31215 qualified citation lists
31216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31222 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31227 dialog will display three columns in the field
31234 \begin_inset space ~
31242 \begin_inset space ~
31250 \begin_inset space ~
31256 If you double-click on an item's
31259 \begin_inset space ~
31267 \begin_inset space ~
31272 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31275 General text before
31281 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31284 \begin_layout Section
31286 \begin_inset Index idx
31289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31305 \begin_layout Standard
31306 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31308 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31310 \begin_inset space ~
31315 or the toolbar button
31322 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31323 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31324 by \SpecialChar LyX
31325 as the index entry.
31328 \begin_layout Standard
31329 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31332 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31334 \begin_inset space ~
31340 A light blue box labeled
31341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31352 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31353 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31358 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31359 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31360 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31361 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31365 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31373 \begin_layout Subsection
31374 Grouping Index Entries
31375 \begin_inset Index idx
31378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31387 \begin_layout Standard
31388 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31390 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31391 lists under the entry
31392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31400 First we create the entry
31401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31409 \begin_inset space ~
31413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31415 reference "subsec:Lists"
31420 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31421 \begin_inset space ~
31425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31427 reference "sec:Itemize"
31431 , we insert the command
31434 \begin_layout Standard
31440 \begin_layout Standard
31444 \begin_layout Standard
31450 \begin_layout Standard
31451 for the enumerated list in section
31452 \begin_inset space ~
31456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31458 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31465 \begin_layout Standard
31466 The exclamation mark
31467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31474 marks the grouping levels.
31475 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31476 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31477 If we don't have an index entry for
31478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31485 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31488 \begin_layout Subsection
31490 \begin_inset Index idx
31493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31494 Index ! Page ranges
31502 \begin_layout Standard
31503 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31505 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31506 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31507 an index entry in section
31508 \begin_inset space ~
31512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31514 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31521 \begin_layout Standard
31524 Paragraph environments|(
31527 \begin_layout Standard
31528 and another entry at the end of section
31529 \begin_inset space ~
31533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31535 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31545 Paragraph environments|)
31548 \begin_layout Standard
31550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31573 respectively start and end the index range.
31574 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31575 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31576 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31577 An example is the index entry
31578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31581 Document ! Settings
31582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31588 \begin_layout Subsection
31590 \begin_inset Index idx
31593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31594 Index ! Cross referencing
31602 \begin_layout Standard
31603 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31604 We referred for example in the index entry
31605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31613 \begin_inset space ~
31617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31619 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31623 ) to the index entry
31624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31631 in the same section using the entry
31634 \begin_layout Standard
31637 GIF|see{Image formats}
31640 \begin_layout Standard
31641 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31643 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31644 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31647 \begin_layout Subsection
31649 \begin_inset Index idx
31652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31653 Index ! Entry order
31661 \begin_layout Standard
31662 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31663 follow the rules for the index order.
31664 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31670 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31672 \begin_inset space ~
31676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31678 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31687 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31688 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31713 \begin_inset Index idx
31716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31717 Dummy entries ! maïs
31723 \begin_inset Index idx
31726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31727 Dummy entries ! maître
31733 \begin_inset Index idx
31736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31737 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31742 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31743 maïs, maison, maître.
31744 To achieve this, we use the command
31747 \begin_layout Standard
31750 previous entry@current entry
31753 \begin_layout Standard
31754 In our case we want to have
31755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31770 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31773 \begin_layout Standard
31779 \begin_layout Standard
31780 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31781 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31783 See the next subsection for an example.
31786 \begin_layout Subsection
31788 \begin_inset Index idx
31791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31792 Index ! Entry layout
31800 \begin_layout Standard
31801 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31802 \begin_inset Index idx
31805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31808 This is an italic dummy entry
31813 You can also format the page number using the character
31814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31821 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31822 -command without a backslash.
31823 We can write for example
31826 \begin_layout Standard
31829 italic page number:|textit
31832 \begin_layout Standard
31833 to get the page number in italic.
31834 \begin_inset Index idx
31837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31838 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31843 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31844 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31862 \begin_inset space ~
31868 Have a look at section
31869 \begin_inset space ~
31873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31875 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31879 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31883 \begin_layout Standard
31884 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31892 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31896 to generate the index, see section
31897 \begin_inset space ~
31901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31903 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31912 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31917 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31918 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31921 key "latexcompanion"
31934 \begin_layout Standard
31935 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31937 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31938 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31939 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31940 If so, put the following in the preamble
31943 \begin_layout Standard
31955 \begin_layout Standard
31959 \begin_layout Standard
31965 \begin_layout Standard
31966 in the index entry.
31967 \begin_inset Index idx
31970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31971 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31976 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31977 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31978 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31981 \begin_layout Standard
31982 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31983 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31984 a bold font for all index entries.
31985 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31997 documentation for details,
31998 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32000 key "makeindex,xindy"
32008 \begin_layout Subsection
32010 \begin_inset Index idx
32013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32022 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32029 \begin_layout Standard
32030 If the index generation program
32034 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32035 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32039 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32040 distribution, is used.
32044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32049 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32050 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32051 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32052 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32053 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32063 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32065 dialog, see section
32066 \begin_inset space ~
32070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32072 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32077 The available options are listed and explained in
32078 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32080 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32086 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32090 \begin_layout Standard
32091 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32092 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32095 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32096 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32100 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32101 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32104 \begin_layout Subsection
32108 \begin_layout Standard
32109 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32110 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32118 next to the standard index.
32120 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32121 that add this feature.
32128 \begin_inset Index idx
32131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32133 packages ! splitidx
32138 package to generate multiple indexes.
32139 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32145 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32147 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32155 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32156 style, but it also includes
32157 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32158 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32166 \begin_layout Standard
32167 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32168 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32171 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32174 and select the option
32176 Use multiple Indexes
32183 already contains the standard index
32184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32192 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32193 also appear as a heading) to the
32197 input field and press the
32202 The new index now also appears in the list.
32203 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32204 label color to the new index.
32207 \begin_layout Standard
32208 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32218 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32219 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32220 are additional features:
32223 \begin_layout Itemize
32224 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32225 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32228 \begin_layout Itemize
32229 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32230 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32235 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32236 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32237 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32238 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32241 \begin_layout Itemize
32246 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32247 code in the name of the index.
32250 \begin_layout Section
32251 Nomenclature/Glossary
32252 \begin_inset Index idx
32255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32262 \begin_inset Index idx
32265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32296 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32303 \begin_layout Standard
32304 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32305 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32306 called nomenclature or glossary.
32309 \begin_layout Standard
32310 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32317 \begin_inset Index idx
32320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32328 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32330 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32337 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32341 \begin_layout Standard
32342 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32343 and then use the menu
32345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32351 \begin_inset space ~
32356 or the toolbar button
32359 arg "nomencl-insert"
32364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32375 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32378 \begin_layout Standard
32379 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32380 The first is the term or
32384 that you wish to define.
32389 of the term or symbol.
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32393 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32401 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32402 code for nomenclature entries the option
32406 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32414 \begin_layout Subsection
32415 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32416 \begin_inset Index idx
32419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32420 Nomenclature ! Layout
32428 \begin_layout Standard
32429 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32433 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32440 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32448 \begin_inset Newline newline
32456 \begin_inset Newline newline
32462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32469 character starts/ends the formula.
32470 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32471 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32483 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32493 \begin_layout Standard
32494 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32495 syntax is given in section
32496 \begin_inset space ~
32500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32502 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32509 \begin_layout Standard
32513 \begin_inset space ~
32518 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32520 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32525 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32532 in this document is:
32533 \begin_inset Newline newline
32538 dummy entry for the character
32543 \begin_inset Newline newline
32555 \begin_inset space ~
32565 font use the command
32594 \begin_layout Standard
32595 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32600 \begin_inset space \space{}
32604 \begin_inset Newline newline
32620 \begin_inset Newline newline
32623 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32624 This command will make the font of all symbols
32631 \begin_inset space ~
32639 \begin_layout Standard
32640 If the characters |
32641 \begin_inset space \space{}
32645 \begin_inset space \space{}
32649 \begin_inset space \space{}
32653 \begin_inset space \space{}
32657 \begin_inset space \space{}
32660 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32661 code they need to be escaped
32662 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32663 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32664 LatexCommand nomenclature
32665 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32666 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32674 \begin_layout Subsection
32675 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32676 \begin_inset Index idx
32679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32680 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32688 \begin_layout Standard
32689 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32690 -code of the symbol
32692 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32694 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32697 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32698 LatexCommand nomenclature
32700 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32708 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32712 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32713 LatexCommand nomenclature
32716 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32722 They will be sorted by
32723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32749 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32752 will be sorted before the
32756 since the character
32757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32764 is considered in sorting.
32767 \begin_layout Standard
32768 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32771 \begin_inset space ~
32776 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32777 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32779 For the example given, you can insert
32783 in this field for the
32784 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32791 will be located before
32792 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32798 \begin_layout Standard
32799 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32814 \begin_layout Subsection
32815 Nomenclature Options
32816 \begin_inset Index idx
32819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32820 Nomenclature ! Options
32826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32828 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32835 \begin_layout Standard
32840 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32841 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32844 \begin_layout Description
32845 refeq Appends the phrase
32846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32861 to every nomenclature entry, where
32867 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32870 \begin_layout Description
32871 refpage Appends the phrase
32872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32887 to every nomenclature entry, where
32893 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32896 \begin_layout Description
32897 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32900 \begin_layout Standard
32901 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32902 class options list in the
32904 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32908 In this document the options
32915 \begin_layout Standard
32916 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32922 \begin_layout Standard
32923 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32924 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32929 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32932 \begin_layout Description
32942 \begin_layout Description
32945 nomrefpage Like the
32952 \begin_layout Description
32955 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32964 \begin_layout Description
32968 \begin_inset space ~
32974 \begin_inset space ~
32979 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32982 \begin_layout Standard
32984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32991 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32992 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32996 \begin_layout Standard
33005 \begin_inset Newline newline
33011 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33015 \begin_inset space ~
33027 unskip, see equation
33030 \begin_inset Newline newline
33037 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33038 \begin_inset Newline newline
33044 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33048 \begin_inset space ~
33065 \begin_layout Standard
33066 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33069 \begin_inset space ~
33074 in the document settings under
33077 \begin_inset space ~
33085 \begin_layout Standard
33093 \begin_inset Newline newline
33097 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33101 \begin_inset space ~
33113 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33115 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33116 \begin_inset Newline newline
33123 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33124 \begin_inset Newline newline
33128 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33132 \begin_inset space ~
33144 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33149 \begin_layout Subsection
33150 Printing the Nomenclature
33151 \begin_inset Index idx
33154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33155 Nomenclature ! Printing
33163 \begin_layout Standard
33164 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33167 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33183 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33184 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33185 You can choose between these settings:
33188 \begin_layout Description
33189 Default a space of 1
33190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33196 \begin_layout Description
33198 \begin_inset space ~
33202 \begin_inset space ~
33205 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33208 \begin_layout Description
33209 Custom custom space
33212 \begin_layout Standard
33213 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33222 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33230 For example, in order to change the name to
33234 , add the following line to the preamble:
33237 \begin_layout Standard
33250 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33253 \begin_layout Standard
33254 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33255 \begin_inset Newline newline
33270 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33273 \begin_layout Subsection
33274 Nomenclature Program
33275 \begin_inset Index idx
33278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33279 Nomenclature ! Program
33285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33287 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33294 \begin_layout Standard
33300 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33301 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33303 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33308 by adding options, see section
33309 \begin_inset space ~
33313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33315 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33320 The available options are listed and explained in
33321 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33323 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33331 \begin_layout Section
33333 \begin_inset Index idx
33336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33343 \begin_inset Index idx
33346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33347 Document ! Branches
33353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33355 name "sec:Branches"
33362 \begin_layout Standard
33363 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33364 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33365 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33366 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33369 \begin_layout Standard
33370 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33371 allows you to put text into branches.
33372 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33373 To create a branch, either select the menu
33375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33376 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33379 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33381 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33388 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33389 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33390 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33391 and whether the name of the branch should
33392 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33393 (see below for an example).
33394 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33395 to the name of the other) and to add
33396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33408 \begin_inset space ~
33411 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33412 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33415 \begin_layout Standard
33416 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33417 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33422 where you can choose a branch.
33423 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33427 \begin_layout Standard
33428 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33429 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33432 \begin_layout Standard
33433 \begin_inset Branch Question
33437 \begin_layout Standard
33442 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33450 \begin_layout Standard
33451 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33455 \begin_layout Standard
33460 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33468 \begin_layout Standard
33475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33476 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33479 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33480 Consider for example a file
33481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33488 which has the above branches.
33490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33497 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33521 branch were inactive,
33522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33537 branch was active, likewise
33538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33553 branch was active, and
33554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33557 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33561 if both branches were active.
33562 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33563 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33569 \begin_layout Standard
33570 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33576 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33577 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33581 \begin_inset space ~
33589 \begin_layout Standard
33590 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33594 \begin_layout Standard
33600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33607 branch is deactivated.
33613 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33619 \begin_layout Standard
33620 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33621 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33622 definitions for each branch.
33623 For example you can define for the question branch
33627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33628 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33629 -syntax, see section
33630 \begin_inset space ~
33634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33636 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33648 \begin_layout Standard
33658 \begin_layout Standard
33668 \begin_layout Standard
33669 and for the answer branch
33672 \begin_layout Standard
33682 \begin_layout Standard
33692 \begin_layout Standard
33693 \begin_inset Branch Question
33697 \begin_layout Standard
33701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33729 \begin_layout Standard
33730 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33734 \begin_layout Standard
33738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33766 \begin_layout Standard
33767 Now it is possible to use the
33771 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33778 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33781 commands to obtain conditional output.
33782 Here is an example formula where only the
33789 \begin_inset Formula
33791 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33799 \begin_layout Standard
33800 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33808 \begin_layout Standard
33809 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33815 \begin_inset space \space{}
33818 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33820 For this advanced usage, see the
33826 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33831 \begin_layout Section
33833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33835 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33840 \begin_inset Index idx
33843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33852 \begin_layout Standard
33855 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33856 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33859 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33861 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33867 \begin_inset Index idx
33870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33872 packages ! hyperref
33877 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33878 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33879 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33880 part of the document.
33884 \begin_layout Standard
33885 The header information in the dialog tab
33889 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33890 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33891 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33892 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33896 \begin_inset space ~
33900 \begin_inset space ~
33905 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33906 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33907 and author entries.
33911 \begin_inset space ~
33915 \begin_inset space ~
33919 \begin_inset space ~
33924 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33927 \begin_layout Standard
33928 You can specify in the dialog tab
33932 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33937 \begin_inset space ~
33941 \begin_inset space ~
33945 \begin_inset space ~
33950 option allows long links to be split;
33953 \begin_inset space ~
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33969 \begin_inset space ~
33974 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33977 \begin_inset space ~
33982 colors the different links.
33983 The default colors are:
33986 \begin_layout Labeling
33987 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33992 for hyperlinks and URLs
33995 \begin_layout Labeling
33996 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34004 \begin_layout Labeling
34005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34013 \begin_layout Standard
34014 but you can change these in the field
34019 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34022 \begin_layout Standard
34025 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34028 \begin_layout Standard
34033 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34034 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34035 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34038 \begin_layout Standard
34043 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34044 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34045 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34055 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34056 when opening the PDF.
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34061 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34062 \begin_inset space ~
34065 1 will only display the sections.
34068 \begin_layout Standard
34069 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34070 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34076 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34077 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34087 \begin_layout Section
34089 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34093 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34100 \begin_layout Subsection
34103 \begin_inset Index idx
34106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34116 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34123 \begin_layout Standard
34124 As \SpecialChar LyX
34125 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34126 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34127 commands and constructs,
34130 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34131 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34132 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34133 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34134 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34135 cannot support all packages and
34139 \begin_layout Standard
34140 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34141 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34142 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34146 Code box is created by the menu
34148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34155 or by the toolbar button
34168 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34176 \begin_layout Standard
34177 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34179 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34181 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34186 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34191 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34198 , you can write the command part
34204 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34205 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34209 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34210 Code box behind the word.
34211 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34212 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34217 \begin_inset Graphics
34218 filename clipart/ERT.png
34226 \begin_layout Standard
34230 \begin_layout Standard
34231 This is a line with a
34235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34258 \begin_layout Standard
34259 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34267 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34268 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34269 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34270 know that the command is finished.
34278 \begin_layout Subsection
34279 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34281 \begin_inset Argument 1
34284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34285 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34292 \begin_inset Index idx
34295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34305 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34313 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34314 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34315 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34316 uses in the background.
34317 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34318 is based on commands, you can
34319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34327 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34328 any time if you know the right commands.
34329 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34330 is the end of the day.
34331 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34332 all caption labels bold.
34333 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34335 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34339 \begin_layout Standard
34340 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34342 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34344 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34347 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34357 \begin_layout Standard
34358 As result you find that the package
34363 \begin_inset Index idx
34366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34374 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34379 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34383 \begin_inset space ~
34391 \begin_layout Standard
34396 usepackage[options]{package name}
34399 \begin_layout Standard
34400 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34401 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34402 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34403 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34406 \begin_layout Standard
34407 In your case the package name is
34412 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34417 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34418 So you add the command
34421 \begin_layout Standard
34426 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34429 \begin_layout Standard
34430 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34435 For more commands provided by the
34439 package, have a look at its documentation,
34440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34455 \begin_layout Standard
34456 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34458 For example if you use a
34462 class, you don't need the package
34466 , you can instead write
34469 \begin_layout Standard
34474 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34479 \begin_layout Standard
34480 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34481 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34482 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34489 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34492 \begin_layout Standard
34493 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34494 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34496 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34497 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34498 Code box as described in the previous
34502 \begin_layout Standard
34503 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34504 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34507 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34509 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34517 \begin_layout Standard
34518 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34524 \begin_layout Standard
34528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34538 \begin_inset Note Note
34541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34542 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34550 \begin_layout Left Header
34551 \begin_inset Argument 1
34554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34574 \begin_inset Note Note
34577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34578 defines the header line as described below
34586 \begin_layout Center Header
34587 \begin_inset Argument 1
34590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34599 \begin_layout Right Header
34600 \begin_inset Argument 1
34603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34624 \begin_layout Left Footer
34625 \begin_inset Argument 1
34628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34649 \begin_layout Center Footer
34650 \begin_inset Argument 1
34653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34665 \begin_inset Newline newline
34669 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34675 \begin_layout Right Footer
34676 \begin_inset Argument 1
34679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34701 \begin_layout Section
34702 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34705 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34710 \begin_inset Index idx
34713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34714 Document ! Header/Footer line
34720 \begin_inset Index idx
34723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34732 \begin_layout Standard
34733 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34737 \begin_inset space ~
34748 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34754 \begin_inset space ~
34760 As a second step add in the menu
34762 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34763 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34772 Custom Header/Footerlines
34775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34779 This module offers the following 6
34780 \begin_inset space ~
34786 \begin_layout Description
34788 \begin_inset space ~
34792 \begin_inset space ~
34796 \begin_inset space ~
34800 \begin_inset space ~
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34810 \begin_layout Description
34812 \begin_inset space ~
34816 \begin_inset space ~
34820 \begin_inset space ~
34824 \begin_inset space ~
34828 \begin_inset space ~
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34835 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34836 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34839 \begin_layout Standard
34840 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34841 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34843 \begin_inset space ~
34847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34849 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34853 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34856 \begin_layout Standard
34857 \begin_inset Float figure
34864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34867 \begin_inset Tabular
34868 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34869 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34870 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34871 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34872 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34874 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34892 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34903 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34921 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34932 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34936 The normal text on the page goes here.
34937 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34939 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34940 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34945 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34954 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34965 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34983 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34994 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35012 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35030 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35035 name "fig:Page-layout"
35039 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35052 \begin_layout Standard
35053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35061 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35065 \begin_inset space ~
35070 is set to “Default”.
35071 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35080 \begin_layout Subsection
35084 \begin_layout Standard
35085 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35086 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35087 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35088 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35090 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35092 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35095 \begin_layout Standard
35096 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35097 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35103 \begin_inset space ~
35111 \begin_layout Description
35114 thepage prints the current page number
35117 \begin_layout Description
35120 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35123 \begin_layout Description
35126 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35129 \begin_layout Description
35132 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35133 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35140 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35143 because it usually goes in a left header.
35146 \begin_layout Description
35149 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35150 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35152 It is normally used in the right header.
35155 \begin_layout Subsection
35156 Default header/footer
35159 \begin_layout Standard
35160 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35161 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35162 footer has the page number.
35163 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35164 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35165 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35168 \begin_inset space ~
35176 \begin_layout Subsection
35180 \begin_layout Standard
35181 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35182 Some pages are different.
35183 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35184 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35185 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35186 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35187 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35191 Header and footer decoration line
35194 \begin_layout Standard
35195 By default, you get a 0.4
35196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35199 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35200 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35212 in the following way:
35215 \begin_layout Standard
35222 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35226 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35239 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35246 \begin_layout Standard
35247 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35249 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35250 \begin_inset space ~
35254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35265 Several header/footer lines
35268 \begin_layout Standard
35269 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35270 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35271 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35273 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35289 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35291 \begin_inset space ~
35299 \begin_layout Standard
35306 headheight}{height}
35309 \begin_layout Standard
35314 is a size in standard units (e.
35315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35319 \begin_inset space \space{}
35327 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35328 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35329 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35330 logfile with the menu
35332 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35342 \begin_inset space ~
35347 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35352 \begin_inset Index idx
35355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35357 packages ! fancyhdr
35363 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35364 for your header/footer.
35367 \begin_layout Subsection
35371 \begin_layout Standard
35372 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35373 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35374 This example consists of the following definition:
35377 \begin_layout Description
35379 \begin_inset space ~
35388 , empty optional argument
35391 \begin_layout Description
35393 \begin_inset space ~
35396 Header empty, empty optional argument
35399 \begin_layout Description
35401 \begin_inset space ~
35410 in the optional argument
35413 \begin_layout Description
35415 \begin_inset space ~
35424 in the optional argument
35427 \begin_layout Description
35429 \begin_inset space ~
35442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35446 \begin_inset Newline newline
35450 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35457 in the optional argument
35460 \begin_layout Description
35462 \begin_inset space ~
35471 , empty optional argument
35474 \begin_layout Description
35477 headrulewidth set to 2
35478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35484 \begin_layout Standard
35485 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35486 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35492 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35502 \begin_layout Standard
35503 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35509 \begin_layout Standard
35513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35517 pagestyle{headings}
35523 \begin_inset Note Note
35526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35527 switches back to page style with the default headings
35535 \begin_layout Section
35536 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35539 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35544 \begin_inset Index idx
35547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35554 \begin_inset Index idx
35557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35566 \begin_layout Standard
35568 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35569 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35570 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35573 \begin_layout Subsection
35577 \begin_layout Standard
35578 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35584 \begin_inset Index idx
35587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35589 packages ! preview-latex
35594 (on some systems named simply
35599 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35601 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35608 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35610 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35618 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35619 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35620 -package are automatically
35621 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35625 \begin_layout Subsection
35629 \begin_layout Standard
35630 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35631 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35633 activate the option
35636 \begin_inset space ~
35643 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35649 \begin_inset space ~
35653 \begin_inset space ~
35656 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35676 \begin_inset space ~
35681 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35684 \begin_layout Standard
35685 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35690 \begin_inset space ~
35698 \begin_inset space ~
35706 \begin_layout Standard
35707 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35708 and when you finish
35712 \begin_layout Standard
35713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35721 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35722 generated by activating the option
35725 \begin_inset space ~
35731 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35739 \begin_layout Subsection
35740 Selected document parts
35743 \begin_layout Standard
35744 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35745 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35746 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35747 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35749 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35755 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35756 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35757 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35760 \begin_layout Standard
35761 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35768 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35780 is explained in section
35782 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35797 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35798 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35799 the final rotated boxes,
35800 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35801 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35803 Here is the result:
35806 \begin_layout Standard
35807 \begin_inset Preview
35809 \begin_layout Standard
35814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35818 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35824 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35834 height_special "totalheight"
35839 backgroundcolor "none"
35842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35867 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35873 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35895 \begin_layout Standard
35896 Previewing works also for colors.
35897 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35916 is explained in section
35923 \begin_inset space ~
35936 \begin_layout Standard
35937 \begin_inset Preview
35939 \begin_layout Standard
35943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35962 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35967 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35986 \begin_layout Standard
35987 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35993 \begin_layout Standard
35994 If \SpecialChar LyX
35995 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35996 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35997 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35998 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35999 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36000 the \SpecialChar TeX
36002 If \SpecialChar LyX
36003 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36004 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36006 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36007 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36008 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36011 \begin_layout Subsection
36016 \begin_layout Standard
36017 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36018 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36021 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36023 \begin_inset space ~
36028 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36030 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36032 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36033 's main window, then only this selection
36034 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36035 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36036 the source view window.
36041 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36042 ; but note that if you have
36043 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36045 not just the one which is open at the time.
36048 \begin_layout Section
36049 Advanced Find and Replace
36050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36052 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36057 \begin_inset Index idx
36060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36067 \begin_inset Index idx
36070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36079 \begin_layout Subsection
36083 \begin_layout Standard
36084 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36085 allows for searching of complex,
36086 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36088 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36089 The key-features are:
36092 \begin_layout Itemize
36093 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36094 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36095 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36099 \begin_layout Itemize
36100 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36101 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36102 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36103 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36106 \begin_layout Itemize
36107 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36108 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36109 outside of mathematics environments
36112 \begin_layout Itemize
36113 Search may be widened to a specific
36118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36122 \begin_inset space ~
36125 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36126 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36133 \begin_layout Itemize
36134 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36135 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36143 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36146 \begin_layout Subsection
36150 \begin_layout Standard
36151 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36153 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36166 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36169 ) or the toolbar button
36172 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36178 Advanced Find and Replace
36183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36187 \begin_layout Standard
36193 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36202 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36205 arg "paragraph-break"
36209 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36210 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36214 arg "paragraph-break"
36217 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36221 searches backwards.
36224 \begin_layout Standard
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36233 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36247 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36250 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36251 Searching for mathematics
36254 \begin_layout Standard
36255 Mathematical formulas, such as
36256 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36259 or something more complex like
36260 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36263 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36268 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36269 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36270 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36271 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36281 \begin_layout Standard
36282 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36283 This is done by switching to the
36287 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36292 This way, entering in the
36299 \begin_layout Itemize
36300 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36301 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36304 \begin_layout Itemize
36305 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36306 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36309 \begin_layout Itemize
36310 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36311 of it only within section headings.
36312 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36313 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36317 \begin_layout Itemize
36318 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36319 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36326 \begin_layout Standard
36327 The entries made in the
36331 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36334 \begin_inset space ~
36340 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36344 button or alternatively press
36347 arg "paragraph-break"
36354 while the cursor is in the
36357 \begin_inset space ~
36365 \begin_layout Standard
36366 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36368 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36372 \begin_layout Itemize
36373 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36374 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36382 with its typewriter version
36383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36397 \begin_layout Itemize
36398 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36404 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36416 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36423 (you may want to enable the
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36439 options and disable the
36447 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36455 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36456 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36460 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36463 , or occurrences of
36464 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36468 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36474 \begin_layout Subsection
36478 \begin_layout Standard
36479 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36484 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36486 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36488 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36498 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36504 This is done with the context menu
36506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36507 Insert Regular Expression
36509 while the cursor is in the
36514 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36515 expression matching rules
36519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36520 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36527 \begin_inset space ~
36530 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36531 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36537 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36538 same text in the document.
36539 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36540 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36543 \begin_layout Enumerate
36544 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36549 editor the fraction
36550 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36554 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36557 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36558 fractions with the given denominator.
36561 \begin_layout Enumerate
36562 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36574 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36579 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36580 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36581 Also, by inserting a
36582 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36585 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36586 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36589 \begin_layout Standard
36590 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36591 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36592 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36595 , and referring back to them through
36596 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36600 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36604 For example, try searching with the regexp
36605 \begin_inset Newline newline
36608 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36611 \begin_inset Newline newline
36614 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36617 \begin_layout Standard
36618 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36621 \begin_layout Standard
36622 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36630 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36631 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36632 sub-expressions is absolute.
36634 \begin_inset space ~
36638 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36641 always refers to the first occurrence of
36642 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36645 in all entered regexps.
36653 \begin_layout Section
36655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36657 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36662 \begin_inset Index idx
36665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36674 \begin_layout Standard
36676 has a built-in spell checker.
36679 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36686 key or the toolbar button
36689 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36692 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36693 beginning of the currently selected text.
36694 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36695 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36696 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36697 scrolled so that it is visible.
36698 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36699 n, if any could be found.
36700 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36704 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36705 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36708 \begin_layout Standard
36709 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36712 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36716 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36717 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36719 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36720 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36723 \begin_inset space ~
36731 arg "dialog-show character"
36734 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36736 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36739 \begin_layout Standard
36740 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36741 can be downloaded from here:
36742 \begin_inset Newline newline
36746 \begin_inset Flex URL
36749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36751 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36757 \begin_inset Newline newline
36761 \begin_inset space ~
36764 files for each language.
36765 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36766 \begin_inset space ~
36769 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36770 's installation subfolder
36778 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36780 \begin_inset Newline newline
36783 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36784 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36785 but in most cases these are
36801 is the language code.
36804 \begin_layout Subsection
36808 \begin_layout Standard
36811 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36812 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36814 \begin_inset space ~
36817 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36820 you can set the following things:
36823 \begin_layout Description
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36828 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36829 should use for spell checking.
36830 Depending on your platform,
36840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36841 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36842 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36860 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36863 \begin_layout Description
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36868 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36869 will always use the given language
36870 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36873 \begin_layout Description
36875 \begin_inset space ~
36878 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36884 \begin_inset space \space{}
36888 This should normally not be needed.
36891 \begin_layout Description
36893 \begin_inset space ~
36897 \begin_inset space ~
36900 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36912 \begin_layout Description
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36917 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36918 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36919 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36920 appear in a context menu.
36921 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36925 \begin_layout Description
36927 \begin_inset space ~
36931 \begin_inset space ~
36935 \begin_inset space ~
36938 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36942 \begin_layout Section
36944 \begin_inset Index idx
36947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36956 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36963 \begin_layout Standard
36965 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36966 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36976 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36978 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36988 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36990 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36991 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36992 which are available for many languages.
36995 \begin_layout Standard
36996 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36997 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37001 \begin_layout Subsection
37002 Setting up the thesaurus
37005 \begin_layout Standard
37014 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37018 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37023 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37037 For instance, the US English files are named:
37040 \begin_layout Itemize
37044 \begin_layout Itemize
37048 \begin_layout Standard
37057 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37058 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37061 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37062 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37063 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37070 ) to the path where they are installed.
37074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37075 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37076 ies, typical locations are
37082 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37086 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37090 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37093 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37099 LibreOffice-<Version>
37106 On the Mac, the default location is
37108 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37109 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37110 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37111 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37112 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37113 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37121 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37122 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37123 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37127 \begin_layout Standard
37128 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37129 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37131 \begin_inset Newline newline
37135 \begin_inset Flex URL
37138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37140 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37148 \begin_layout Standard
37149 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37150 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37152 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37153 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37154 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37156 \begin_inset space ~
37161 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37163 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37164 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37168 \begin_layout Standard
37169 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37171 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37174 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37180 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37183 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37184 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37193 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37194 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37196 \begin_inset space ~
37201 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37204 \begin_layout Subsection
37205 Using the thesaurus
37208 \begin_layout Standard
37209 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37211 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37214 or the toolbar button
37217 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37220 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37222 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37224 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37225 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37226 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37235 ), related terms (such as
37238 \begin_inset space ~
37247 ), compounds (such as
37250 \begin_inset space ~
37259 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37268 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37271 \begin_layout Standard
37272 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37273 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37277 \begin_layout Standard
37278 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37279 the dictionary, such as the above
37283 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37288 \begin_inset space \space{}
37291 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37292 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37293 For example, looking up the word form
37297 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37302 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37307 \begin_inset space \space{}
37318 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37319 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37320 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37323 \begin_layout Section
37325 \begin_inset Index idx
37328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37335 \begin_inset Index idx
37338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37339 Document ! Change Tracking
37345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37347 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37354 \begin_layout Standard
37355 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37356 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37357 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37358 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37362 \begin_inset space ~
37365 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37367 \begin_inset space ~
37375 \begin_layout Standard
37376 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37390 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37391 You can change the color in
37393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37394 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37396 \begin_inset space ~
37400 \begin_inset space ~
37405 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37411 \begin_inset Index idx
37414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37415 Color ! Change tracking
37420 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37421 's status bar when the
37422 cursor is in changed text.
37423 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37426 arg "changes-merge"
37432 \begin_layout Standard
37433 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37435 \begin_inset Index idx
37438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37447 \begin_layout Standard
37448 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37454 \begin_layout Standard
37455 \begin_inset Graphics
37456 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37464 \begin_layout Standard
37465 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37471 \begin_layout Standard
37472 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37475 \begin_layout Standard
37476 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37482 \begin_layout Standard
37483 \begin_inset Tabular
37484 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37485 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37487 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37497 arg "changes-track"
37505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37513 \begin_inset space ~
37516 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37536 arg "changes-output"
37544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37552 \begin_inset space ~
37555 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37557 \begin_inset space ~
37561 \begin_inset space ~
37565 \begin_inset space ~
37574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37595 Jumps to the next change
37601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37610 arg "change-accept"
37618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37624 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37629 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37631 \begin_inset space ~
37640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37649 arg "change-reject"
37657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37663 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37665 \begin_inset space ~
37668 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37670 \begin_inset space ~
37679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37688 arg "changes-merge"
37696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37702 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37704 \begin_inset space ~
37707 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37709 \begin_inset space ~
37718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37727 arg "all-changes-accept"
37735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37746 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37748 \begin_inset space ~
37752 \begin_inset space ~
37761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37770 arg "all-changes-reject"
37778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37786 \begin_inset space ~
37789 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37795 \begin_inset space ~
37804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37828 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37830 \begin_inset space ~
37839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37862 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37864 \begin_inset space ~
37880 \begin_layout Standard
37881 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37887 \begin_layout Standard
37888 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37908 \begin_layout Standard
37909 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37910 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37911 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37912 the next change after the current cursor position.
37913 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37914 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37915 step to the next change.
37916 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37919 \begin_layout Standard
37920 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37921 to describe a change.
37924 \begin_layout Standard
37925 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37931 \begin_inset Index idx
37934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37942 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37944 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37951 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37955 \begin_layout Section
37956 Comparison of Documents
37957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37959 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37964 \begin_inset Index idx
37967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37968 Comparison of documents
37976 \begin_layout Standard
37977 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37980 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37984 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37985 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37987 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37989 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37993 \begin_inset space ~
37997 \begin_inset space ~
38001 \begin_inset space ~
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38014 \begin_inset space ~
38018 \begin_inset space ~
38022 \begin_inset space ~
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38030 \begin_inset space ~
38035 enables the change tracking option
38038 \begin_inset space ~
38042 \begin_inset space ~
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38051 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38054 \begin_layout Section
38055 International Support
38056 \begin_inset Index idx
38059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38060 International support
38068 \begin_layout Standard
38069 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38070 with any language you want.
38071 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38072 up \SpecialChar LyX
38074 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38076 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38084 \begin_layout Standard
38085 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38086 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38093 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38100 \begin_layout Subsection
38102 \begin_inset Index idx
38105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38112 \begin_inset Index idx
38115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38116 Document ! Settings
38122 \begin_inset Index idx
38125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38126 Document ! Language
38134 \begin_layout Standard
38137 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38138 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38141 dialog lets you set
38143 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38148 \begin_layout Standard
38153 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38158 \begin_inset space ~
38163 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38164 For details about the different encoding options see section
38165 \begin_inset space ~
38169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38171 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38178 \begin_layout Subsection
38179 Keyboard mapping configuration
38180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38182 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38190 If you have for example a U.
38191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38194 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38195 can use an alternate keymap.
38196 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38201 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38202 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38203 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38206 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38207 \begin_inset space ~
38211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38213 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38218 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38219 which one you want to use.
38222 \begin_layout Standard
38223 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38224 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38225 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38229 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38230 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38231 one to support the characters you want.
38232 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38239 \begin_layout Chapter
38242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38244 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38251 \begin_layout Standard
38252 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38253 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38254 topic inside the user's guide.
38257 \begin_layout Section
38259 \begin_inset Index idx
38262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38271 \begin_layout Standard
38276 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38279 \begin_layout Subsection
38283 \begin_layout Standard
38284 Creates a new document.
38287 \begin_layout Subsection
38291 \begin_layout Standard
38292 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38293 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38294 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38296 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38297 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38303 \begin_layout Subsection
38307 \begin_layout Standard
38311 \begin_layout Subsection
38315 \begin_layout Standard
38316 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38317 Click there on a file to open it.
38320 \begin_layout Subsection
38322 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38326 \begin_layout Standard
38328 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38329 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38333 \begin_layout Subsection
38337 \begin_layout Standard
38338 Closes the current document.
38341 \begin_layout Subsection
38345 \begin_layout Standard
38346 Closes all opened documents.
38349 \begin_layout Subsection
38353 \begin_layout Standard
38354 Saves the actual document.
38357 \begin_layout Subsection
38361 \begin_layout Standard
38362 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38363 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38367 \begin_layout Subsection
38369 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38373 \begin_layout Standard
38375 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38376 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38382 \begin_layout Subsection
38386 \begin_layout Standard
38387 Saves all opened documents.
38390 \begin_layout Subsection
38394 \begin_layout Standard
38395 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38398 \begin_layout Subsection
38402 \begin_layout Standard
38403 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38404 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38405 It is described in the section
38407 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38412 Additional Features
38417 \begin_layout Subsection
38421 \begin_layout Standard
38422 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38423 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38425 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38426 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38430 \begin_layout Standard
38431 When using the menu entry
38434 \begin_inset space ~
38439 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38443 \begin_inset space ~
38447 \begin_inset space ~
38451 \begin_inset space ~
38456 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38457 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38460 \begin_layout Subsection
38462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38464 name "subsec:Export"
38471 \begin_layout Standard
38472 You can export your document to various file formats.
38473 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38475 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38476 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38477 during its configuration.
38480 \begin_layout Standard
38481 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38483 \begin_inset space ~
38487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38489 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38496 \begin_layout Description
38502 \begin_inset space ~
38505 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38507 \begin_inset space ~
38510 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38511 \begin_inset Newline newline
38514 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38515 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38519 \begin_layout Description
38520 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38526 \begin_layout Description
38528 \begin_inset space ~
38531 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38537 \begin_layout Description
38538 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38539 's native DVI-format.
38540 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38541 files paths or file names in your document.
38543 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38550 \begin_layout Description
38551 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38552 in files paths or file names
38555 \begin_layout Description
38557 \begin_inset space ~
38564 ) DVI-format using the program
38566 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38569 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38581 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38589 \begin_layout Description
38591 \begin_inset space ~
38594 (cropped) the same as
38598 but with cropped page margins.
38601 \begin_layout Description
38603 \begin_inset space ~
38606 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38610 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38615 \begin_layout Description
38619 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38635 \begin_layout Description
38637 \begin_inset space ~
38641 \begin_inset space ~
38644 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38648 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38656 \begin_layout Description
38660 \begin_inset space ~
38669 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38670 source that is compilable with the program
38672 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38676 \begin_layout Description
38680 \begin_inset space ~
38685 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38686 source, additionally all images used in the document
38687 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38691 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38694 \begin_layout Description
38698 \begin_inset space ~
38703 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38704 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38705 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38713 \begin_layout Description
38717 \begin_inset space ~
38726 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38727 source that is compilable with the program
38733 \begin_layout Description
38735 \begin_inset space ~
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38746 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38747 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38753 \begin_layout Description
38755 \begin_inset space ~
38758 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38759 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38765 \begin_inset space \space{}
38770 \begin_inset space ~
38774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38789 represent the version number)
38792 \begin_layout Description
38794 \begin_inset space ~
38798 \begin_inset space ~
38801 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38802 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38803 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38807 \begin_layout Description
38808 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38809 's internal XHTML engine
38812 \begin_layout Description
38814 \begin_inset space ~
38818 \begin_inset space ~
38822 \begin_inset space ~
38826 \begin_inset space ~
38829 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38834 For the conversion the program
38843 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38846 \begin_layout Description
38847 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38852 \begin_layout Description
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38857 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38859 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38862 For the conversion the program
38871 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38874 \begin_layout Description
38876 \begin_inset space ~
38879 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38880 For the conversion the program
38889 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38892 \begin_layout Description
38894 \begin_inset space ~
38897 (cropped) the same as
38900 \begin_inset space ~
38905 but with cropped page margins
38908 \begin_layout Description
38912 \begin_inset space ~
38917 PDF-format using the program
38921 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38924 \begin_layout Description
38928 \begin_inset space ~
38932 \begin_inset space ~
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38945 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38950 \begin_inset space \space{}
38953 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38957 \begin_layout Description
38961 \begin_inset space ~
38966 PDF-format using the program
38968 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38971 , produces PDF-files directly
38974 \begin_layout Description
38978 \begin_inset space ~
38983 PDF-format using the program
38987 , produces PDF-files directly
38990 \begin_layout Description
38994 \begin_inset space ~
38999 PDF-format using the program
39003 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39006 \begin_layout Description
39010 \begin_inset space ~
39015 PDF-format using the program
39020 , produces PDF-files directly
39023 \begin_layout Description
39027 \begin_inset space ~
39035 \begin_layout Description
39039 \begin_inset space ~
39043 \begin_inset space ~
39048 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39049 and then exported as text using the program
39054 \begin_layout Description
39059 PostScript format using the program
39067 options see section
39068 \begin_inset space ~
39072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39074 reference "subsec:General-output"
39081 \begin_layout Description
39082 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39083 source and also code in the statistical programming
39097 it is possible to use
39101 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39105 \begin_layout Standard
39106 If one of the menu entries
39113 \begin_inset space ~
39122 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39124 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39126 \begin_inset space ~
39130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39132 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39137 \begin_inset Index idx
39140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39141 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39150 \begin_layout Subsection
39154 \begin_layout Standard
39155 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39156 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39159 \begin_inset space ~
39163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39165 reference "sec:Paths"
39170 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39179 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39180 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39181 's preferences as described in section
39182 \begin_inset space ~
39186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39188 reference "subsec:Converters"
39195 \begin_layout Subsection
39196 New and Close Window
39199 \begin_layout Standard
39200 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39204 \begin_layout Subsection
39208 \begin_layout Standard
39209 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39212 \begin_layout Section
39214 \begin_inset Index idx
39217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39226 \begin_layout Subsection
39230 \begin_layout Standard
39231 Described in section
39232 \begin_inset space ~
39236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39238 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39245 \begin_layout Subsection
39246 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39249 \begin_layout Standard
39250 Described in section
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39257 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39264 \begin_layout Subsection
39268 \begin_layout Standard
39269 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39270 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39273 \begin_layout Subsection
39277 \begin_layout Standard
39278 Selects the whole document.
39281 \begin_layout Subsection
39282 Find & Replace (Quick)
39285 \begin_layout Standard
39286 Described in section
39287 \begin_inset space ~
39291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39293 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39300 \begin_layout Subsection
39301 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39304 \begin_layout Standard
39305 Described in section
39306 \begin_inset space ~
39310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39312 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39319 \begin_layout Subsection
39320 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39323 \begin_layout Standard
39324 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39328 \begin_layout Subsection
39330 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39334 \begin_layout Standard
39336 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39337 Described in section
39338 \begin_inset space ~
39342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39344 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39353 \begin_layout Subsection
39355 \begin_inset Index idx
39358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39359 Paragraph ! Settings
39367 \begin_layout Standard
39368 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39369 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39373 \begin_layout Standard
39374 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39375 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39381 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39382 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39384 \begin_inset space ~
39390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39394 \begin_layout Subsection
39396 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39400 \begin_layout Standard
39402 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39403 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39408 \begin_layout Enumerate
39410 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39411 Customize text properties by means of the
39417 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39420 ; this is described in section
39421 \begin_inset space ~
39425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39427 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39434 \begin_layout Enumerate
39436 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39437 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39439 Apply last settings
39442 \begin_layout Enumerate
39444 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39445 Change the casing of selected text (
39460 \begin_layout Subsection
39462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39466 \begin_layout Standard
39468 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39469 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39470 text styles (in the case of this document:
39492 \begin_inset space ~
39496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39498 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39507 \begin_layout Subsection
39508 Table and Rows & Columns
39511 \begin_layout Standard
39512 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39513 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39514 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39517 \begin_layout Subsection
39521 \begin_layout Standard
39522 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39523 It will dissolve this inset.
39524 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39528 \begin_layout Subsection
39532 \begin_layout Standard
39533 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39534 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39537 \begin_layout Subsection
39538 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39541 \begin_layout Standard
39542 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39544 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39545 \begin_inset space ~
39549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39551 reference "sec:Nesting"
39556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39558 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39565 \begin_layout Section
39567 \begin_inset Index idx
39570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39579 \begin_layout Standard
39580 At the bottom of the
39584 menu the opened documents are listed.
39587 \begin_layout Subsection
39588 Open/Close all Insets
39591 \begin_layout Standard
39592 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39595 \begin_layout Subsection
39596 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39599 \begin_layout Standard
39600 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39603 \begin_layout Standard
39604 Math macros are described in the
39611 \begin_layout Subsection
39615 \begin_layout Standard
39616 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39617 \begin_inset space ~
39621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39623 reference "sec:Navigating"
39628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39630 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39637 \begin_layout Subsection
39641 \begin_layout Standard
39642 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39644 \begin_inset space ~
39648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39650 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39657 \begin_layout Subsection
39661 \begin_layout Standard
39662 Opens a window showing console messages.
39663 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39668 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39669 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39670 is processing the document.
39673 \begin_layout Subsection
39675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39677 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39682 \begin_inset Index idx
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39694 \begin_layout Standard
39695 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39697 All toolbars and the
39700 \begin_inset space ~
39705 can be turned on and off.
39710 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39734 \begin_inset space ~
39739 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39743 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39750 \begin_layout Standard
39755 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39759 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39760 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39761 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39762 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39763 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39766 \begin_layout Standard
39768 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39769 \begin_inset space ~
39773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39775 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39782 \begin_layout Subsection
39786 \begin_layout Standard
39790 \begin_inset space ~
39794 \begin_inset space ~
39798 \begin_inset space ~
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39806 \begin_inset space ~
39810 \begin_inset space ~
39815 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39816 's main window vertically while
39819 \begin_inset space ~
39823 \begin_inset space ~
39827 \begin_inset space ~
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39835 \begin_inset space ~
39839 \begin_inset space ~
39844 will split it horizontally.
39845 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39846 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39847 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39848 three or more documents at the same time.
39849 To close a split view, use the menu
39852 \begin_inset space ~
39856 \begin_inset space ~
39864 \begin_layout Subsection
39868 \begin_layout Standard
39869 Closes a split view.
39872 \begin_layout Subsection
39876 \begin_layout Standard
39877 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39878 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39879 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39880 's main window fullscreen.
39881 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39882 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39885 \begin_layout Section
39887 \begin_inset Index idx
39890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39899 \begin_layout Subsection
39903 \begin_layout Standard
39904 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39905 \begin_inset space ~
39909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39911 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39922 \begin_layout Subsection
39924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39926 name "subsec:Special-Character"
39933 \begin_layout Standard
39934 Here you can insert the following characters:
39937 \begin_layout Description
39942 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
39945 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
39946 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39947 -packages you have installed.
39948 You can get a complete display by checking
39951 \begin_inset space ~
39957 \begin_inset Newline newline
39961 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39969 Not all characters will be visible in the
39973 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39974 dialog (see section
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39981 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39985 ) can display every character.
39993 \begin_layout Description
39994 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39998 \begin_layout Description
40000 \begin_inset space ~
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40007 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40014 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40021 \begin_layout Description
40023 \begin_inset space ~
40026 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40030 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40036 \begin_layout Description
40038 \begin_inset space ~
40041 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40045 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40051 \begin_layout Description
40053 \begin_inset space ~
40056 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40060 \begin_layout Description
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40065 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40069 \begin_layout Description
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40074 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40080 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40086 \begin_layout Description
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40091 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40095 \begin_layout Description
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40101 \begin_inset Index idx
40104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40111 \begin_inset Index idx
40114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40115 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40120 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40121 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40123 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40129 \begin_inset Index idx
40132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40140 \begin_inset Newline newline
40143 More information about this feature can be found in the
40149 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40155 \begin_layout Description
40156 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40158 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40159 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40163 \begin_layout Subsection
40167 \begin_layout Standard
40168 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40171 \begin_layout Description
40172 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40173 \begin_inset script superscript
40175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40184 \begin_layout Description
40185 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40186 \begin_inset script subscript
40188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40197 \begin_layout Description
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40202 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40203 \begin_inset space ~
40207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40209 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40216 \begin_layout Description
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40221 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40228 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40235 \begin_layout Description
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40240 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40241 \begin_inset space ~
40245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40247 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40254 \begin_layout Description
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40259 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40265 \begin_inset space \space{}
40268 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40269 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40278 To insert a fraction use the command
40283 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40287 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40296 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40303 \begin_layout Description
40305 \begin_inset space ~
40308 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40315 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40322 \begin_layout Description
40324 \begin_inset space ~
40327 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40334 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40341 \begin_layout Description
40343 \begin_inset space ~
40346 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40347 \begin_inset space ~
40351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40353 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40360 \begin_layout Description
40361 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40362 \begin_inset space ~
40366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40368 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40375 \begin_layout Description
40377 \begin_inset space ~
40380 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40381 \begin_inset space ~
40385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40387 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40394 \begin_layout Description
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40399 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40400 \begin_inset space ~
40404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40406 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40413 \begin_layout Description
40415 \begin_inset space ~
40419 \begin_inset space ~
40422 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40425 \begin_inset space ~
40429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40431 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40438 for a usage example.
40441 \begin_layout Description
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40447 \begin_inset space ~
40450 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40451 \begin_inset space ~
40455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40457 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40464 \begin_layout Description
40466 \begin_inset space ~
40469 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40470 as described in section
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40477 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40484 \begin_layout Description
40486 \begin_inset space ~
40489 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40496 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40503 \begin_layout Description
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40508 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40509 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40517 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40524 \begin_layout Description
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40529 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40536 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40543 \begin_layout Description
40545 \begin_inset space ~
40549 \begin_inset space ~
40552 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40553 \begin_inset space ~
40557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40559 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40566 \begin_layout Subsection
40568 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40572 \begin_layout Standard
40574 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40575 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40576 The submenu allows you to insert
40579 \begin_layout Description
40581 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40583 \begin_inset space ~
40586 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40589 \begin_layout Description
40591 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40593 \begin_inset space ~
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40600 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40604 \begin_layout Description
40606 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40608 \begin_inset space ~
40611 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40614 \begin_layout Description
40616 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40621 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40624 \begin_layout Description
40626 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40628 \begin_inset space ~
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40635 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40639 \begin_layout Description
40641 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40643 \begin_inset space ~
40646 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40649 \begin_layout Description
40651 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40653 \begin_inset space ~
40657 \begin_inset space ~
40661 \begin_inset space ~
40664 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40667 \begin_layout Description
40669 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40674 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40676 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40677 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40683 \begin_layout Description
40685 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40687 \begin_inset space ~
40690 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40692 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40693 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40699 \begin_layout Description
40701 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40702 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40703 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40704 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40707 \begin_layout Subsection
40711 \begin_layout Standard
40712 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40716 \begin_inset space ~
40737 are described in section
40738 \begin_inset space ~
40742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40744 reference "sec:toc"
40753 is described in section
40754 \begin_inset space ~
40758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40760 reference "sec:Index"
40768 is described in section
40769 \begin_inset space ~
40773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40775 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40781 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40784 is described in section
40785 \begin_inset space ~
40789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40791 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40798 \begin_layout Subsection
40802 \begin_layout Standard
40803 To insert floats, as described in section
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40810 reference "sec:Floats"
40814 and in detail the chapter
40821 \begin_inset space ~
40829 \begin_layout Subsection
40833 \begin_layout Standard
40834 To insert notes, described in section
40835 \begin_inset space ~
40839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40841 reference "sec:Notes"
40848 \begin_layout Subsection
40852 \begin_layout Standard
40853 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40855 Branches are described in section
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40862 reference "sec:Branches"
40869 \begin_layout Subsection
40873 \begin_layout Standard
40874 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40875 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40877 An example is the document class
40878 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
40880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40888 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
40892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40897 with three custom insets.
40900 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40904 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40910 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40913 \begin_layout Subsection
40915 \begin_inset Index idx
40918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40927 \begin_layout Standard
40928 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40930 For more information see chapter
40932 External Document Parts
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40941 \begin_layout Subsection
40943 \begin_inset Index idx
40946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40955 \begin_layout Standard
40956 Inserts a box in a certain style.
40957 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
40964 \begin_inset space ~
40972 \begin_layout Subsection
40976 \begin_layout Standard
40981 dialog as described in section
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40988 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40995 \begin_layout Subsection
40999 \begin_layout Standard
41004 as described in section
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41011 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41018 \begin_layout Subsection
41022 \begin_layout Standard
41027 as described in section
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41034 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41041 \begin_layout Subsection
41043 \begin_inset Index idx
41046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41053 \begin_inset Index idx
41056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41057 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41065 \begin_layout Standard
41066 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41067 Floats are described in section
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41074 reference "sec:Floats"
41078 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41080 Multi-page Captions
41085 \begin_inset space ~
41093 \begin_layout Subsection
41097 \begin_layout Standard
41098 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41099 \begin_inset space ~
41103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41105 reference "sec:Index"
41112 \begin_layout Subsection
41116 \begin_layout Standard
41117 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41118 \begin_inset space ~
41122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41124 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41131 \begin_layout Subsection
41135 \begin_layout Standard
41136 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41137 Tables are described in section
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41144 reference "sec:Tables"
41148 and in detail in the chapter
41155 \begin_inset space ~
41163 \begin_layout Subsection
41167 \begin_layout Standard
41173 Graphics are described in section
41174 \begin_inset space ~
41178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41180 reference "sec:Graphics"
41187 \begin_layout Subsection
41191 \begin_layout Standard
41192 Inserts a URL as described in section
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41199 reference "subsec:URLs"
41206 \begin_layout Subsection
41210 \begin_layout Standard
41211 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41212 \begin_inset space ~
41216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41218 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41225 \begin_layout Subsection
41229 \begin_layout Standard
41230 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41231 \begin_inset space ~
41235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41237 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41244 \begin_layout Subsection
41248 \begin_layout Standard
41249 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41250 \begin_inset space ~
41254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41256 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41263 \begin_layout Subsection
41266 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41269 \begin_layout Standard
41270 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41271 environments of the same type.
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41279 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41283 for an explanation.
41286 \begin_layout Subsection
41290 \begin_layout Standard
41291 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41292 title or caption of a float.
41293 Inserts a short title as described in section
41294 \begin_inset space ~
41298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41300 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41307 \begin_layout Subsection
41312 \begin_layout Standard
41313 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41314 Code box as described in section
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41321 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41328 \begin_layout Subsection
41330 \begin_inset Index idx
41333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41342 \begin_layout Standard
41343 Inserts a program listings box.
41344 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41346 Program Code Listings
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41359 \begin_layout Subsection
41361 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41365 \begin_layout Standard
41367 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41368 Inserts the actual date.
41369 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41376 \begin_layout Subsection
41380 \begin_layout Standard
41381 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41388 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41395 \begin_layout Section
41397 \begin_inset Index idx
41400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41409 \begin_layout Standard
41410 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41411 \begin_inset space ~
41414 of the current document.
41415 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41418 \begin_layout Subsection
41422 \begin_layout Standard
41423 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41424 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41425 to jump, for example, between section
41426 \begin_inset space ~
41430 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41434 2.5 and use the submenu
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41441 \begin_inset space ~
41448 \begin_inset space ~
41454 \begin_inset space ~
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41464 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41468 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41474 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41477 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41480 \begin_layout Standard
41481 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41485 \begin_inset space ~
41490 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41498 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41501 \begin_layout Subsection
41502 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41505 \begin_layout Standard
41506 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41510 \begin_layout Subsection
41514 \begin_layout Standard
41515 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41516 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41517 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41525 \begin_inset space ~
41533 \begin_layout Subsection
41537 \begin_layout Standard
41538 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41541 The \SpecialChar LyX
41542 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41552 \begin_inset space ~
41557 manual for a detailed description.
41560 \begin_layout Section
41562 \begin_inset Index idx
41565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41574 \begin_layout Subsection
41578 \begin_layout Standard
41579 Change Tracking is described in section
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41586 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41593 \begin_layout Subsection
41601 \begin_layout Standard
41602 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41603 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41604 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41606 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41607 to the clipboard or update the view.
41608 \begin_inset Newline newline
41611 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41615 \begin_layout Standard
41618 Open Containing Directory
41620 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41621 's temporary folder for the document.
41622 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41623 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41624 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41625 For example some journals require to send the
41629 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41633 \begin_layout Subsection
41634 Start Appendix Here
41637 \begin_layout Standard
41638 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41639 as described in section
41640 \begin_inset space ~
41644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41646 reference "sec:Appendices"
41653 \begin_layout Subsection
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41661 \begin_layout Standard
41662 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41663 default output format for the document (menu
41665 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41666 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41667 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41669 \begin_inset space ~
41673 \begin_inset space ~
41679 \begin_inset space ~
41683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41685 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41689 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41692 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41693 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41698 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41700 \begin_inset space ~
41703 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41705 \begin_inset space ~
41709 \begin_inset space ~
41715 \begin_inset space ~
41719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41721 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41725 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41726 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41728 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41729 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41734 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41739 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41749 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41754 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41755 when it is first configured.
41756 The default output format is
41759 \begin_inset space ~
41767 \begin_layout Subsection
41768 View (Other Formats)
41771 \begin_layout Standard
41772 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41773 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41774 actual document with an external program.
41775 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41776 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41777 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41779 All possible formats are listed in section
41780 \begin_inset space ~
41784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41786 reference "subsec:Export"
41791 You should at least see the menu entry
41796 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41798 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41806 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41811 \begin_inset Index idx
41814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41815 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41824 \begin_layout Standard
41825 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41826 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41828 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41829 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41831 \begin_inset space ~
41834 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41839 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41849 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41854 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41855 when it is first configured.
41858 \begin_layout Subsection
41860 \begin_inset space ~
41866 \begin_layout Standard
41867 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41868 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41871 \begin_layout Subsection
41872 Update (Other Formats)
41875 \begin_layout Standard
41876 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41877 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41880 \begin_layout Subsection
41881 View Master Document
41884 \begin_layout Standard
41885 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41901 \begin_inset space ~
41906 manual for more information on this topic).
41907 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41908 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41916 \begin_inset space ~
41921 generates the output of the whole book, while
41925 will just output the chapter alone.
41928 \begin_layout Standard
41929 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41930 in the document settings (menu
41932 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41933 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41934 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41936 \begin_inset space ~
41940 \begin_inset space ~
41946 \begin_inset space ~
41950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41952 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41956 ) or in the preferences (menu
41958 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41959 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41961 \begin_inset space ~
41964 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41966 \begin_inset space ~
41969 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41971 \begin_inset space ~
41975 \begin_inset space ~
41981 \begin_inset space ~
41985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41987 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41994 \begin_layout Subsection
41995 Update Master Document
41998 \begin_layout Standard
41999 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42015 \begin_inset space ~
42020 manual for more information on this topic).
42021 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42022 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42025 \begin_layout Standard
42026 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42027 in the document settings (menu
42029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42030 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42031 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42033 \begin_inset space ~
42037 \begin_inset space ~
42043 \begin_inset space ~
42047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42049 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42053 ) or in the preferences (menu
42055 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42056 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42058 \begin_inset space ~
42061 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42063 \begin_inset space ~
42066 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42068 \begin_inset space ~
42072 \begin_inset space ~
42078 \begin_inset space ~
42082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42084 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42091 \begin_layout Subsection
42093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42095 name "subsec:Compressed"
42102 \begin_layout Standard
42103 Un/compresses the current document.
42104 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42105 compression (see the
42107 Additional Features
42109 manual for details).
42112 \begin_layout Subsection
42116 \begin_layout Standard
42117 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42120 \begin_layout Subsection
42124 \begin_layout Standard
42125 The document settings are described in appendix
42126 \begin_inset space ~
42130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42132 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42139 \begin_layout Section
42141 \begin_inset Index idx
42144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42153 \begin_layout Subsection
42157 \begin_layout Standard
42158 Spell checking is explained in section
42159 \begin_inset space ~
42163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42165 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42172 \begin_layout Subsection
42176 \begin_layout Standard
42177 The thesaurus is described in section
42178 \begin_inset space ~
42182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42184 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42191 \begin_layout Subsection
42193 \begin_inset Index idx
42196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42203 \begin_inset Index idx
42206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42215 \begin_layout Standard
42216 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42217 the highlighted document part.
42220 \begin_layout Subsection
42226 \begin_inset Index idx
42229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42230 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42239 \begin_layout Standard
42240 Generates with the help of the program
42242 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42245 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42246 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42247 This feature is not available on Windows.
42250 \begin_layout Subsection
42256 \begin_inset Index idx
42259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42269 \begin_layout Standard
42270 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42275 \begin_inset space ~
42280 to see the full filename paths.
42283 \begin_layout Subsection
42285 \begin_inset Index idx
42288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42297 \begin_layout Standard
42298 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42299 files as described in section
42300 \begin_inset space ~
42304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42306 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42313 \begin_layout Subsection
42315 \begin_inset Index idx
42318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42331 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42349 \begin_inset Index idx
42352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42353 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42362 \begin_layout Standard
42363 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42364 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42365 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42366 -packages and programs it needs; see
42368 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42374 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42381 \begin_layout Subsection
42385 \begin_layout Standard
42390 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42391 \begin_inset space ~
42395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42397 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42404 \begin_layout Section
42406 \begin_inset Index idx
42409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42418 \begin_layout Standard
42419 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42420 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42422 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42426 \begin_layout Standard
42430 \begin_inset space ~
42435 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42436 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42437 packages and classes found
42438 by \SpecialChar LyX
42440 \begin_inset space ~
42444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42446 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42453 \begin_layout Standard
42457 \begin_inset space ~
42462 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42467 \begin_layout Section
42469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42471 name "sec:Toolbars"
42478 \begin_layout Standard
42479 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42486 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42493 \begin_layout Standard
42494 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42495 This is described in the
42497 Additional Features
42502 \begin_layout Subsection
42504 \begin_inset Index idx
42507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42516 \begin_layout Standard
42517 \begin_inset Graphics
42518 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42526 \begin_layout Standard
42527 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42533 \begin_layout Standard
42534 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42551 \begin_inset Note Note
42554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42555 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42560 manual for more information.
42568 \begin_layout Standard
42569 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42575 \begin_layout Standard
42576 \begin_inset Tabular
42577 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42578 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42579 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42580 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42586 \begin_inset Graphics
42587 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42601 pull-down box for the environments
42614 \begin_layout Standard
42615 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42621 \begin_layout Standard
42623 \begin_inset Tabular
42624 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42625 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42626 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42627 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42628 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42651 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42681 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42711 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42727 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42741 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42757 arg "spelling-continuously"
42765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 Spellcheck continuously
42775 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42798 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42828 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42888 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42918 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42920 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
42925 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42943 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
42951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42957 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42983 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42997 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43016 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43025 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43039 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43040 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43068 Emphasize text, function of the
43069 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43072 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43074 \begin_inset space ~
43077 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43079 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43085 arg "dialog-show character"
43096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43117 Set text to noun style, function of the
43118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43121 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43126 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43134 arg "dialog-show character"
43145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43151 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43154 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43167 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43170 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43177 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43183 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43188 arg "textstyle-apply"
43198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43203 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43204 Format text using the current settings in the
43206 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43208 \begin_inset space ~
43211 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43246 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43248 \begin_inset space ~
43257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43266 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43294 arg "tabular-insert"
43302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43308 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43321 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43324 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43337 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43356 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43368 Toggle outline window on/off,
43370 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43386 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43398 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43413 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43425 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43438 \begin_layout Subsection
43440 \begin_inset Index idx
43443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43452 \begin_layout Standard
43453 \begin_inset Graphics
43454 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43462 \begin_layout Standard
43463 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43469 \begin_layout Standard
43470 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43474 \begin_layout Standard
43475 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43481 \begin_layout Standard
43482 \begin_inset Tabular
43483 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43484 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43485 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43523 arg "layout Enumerate"
43531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43550 arg "layout Itemize"
43558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43595 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43604 arg "layout Description"
43612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43631 arg "depth-increment"
43639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43645 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43647 \begin_inset space ~
43651 \begin_inset space ~
43660 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43669 arg "depth-decrement"
43677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43683 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43685 \begin_inset space ~
43689 \begin_inset space ~
43698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43707 arg "float-insert figure"
43715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43721 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43722 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43729 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43738 arg "float-insert table"
43746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43753 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43799 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43813 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43829 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43850 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43875 \begin_inset space ~
43884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43893 arg "nomencl-insert"
43901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43907 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43909 \begin_inset space ~
43918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43927 arg "footnote-insert"
43935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43957 arg "marginalnote-insert"
43965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43971 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43973 \begin_inset space ~
43982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44006 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44008 \begin_inset space ~
44017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44026 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44120 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44135 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44151 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44165 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44166 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44168 \begin_inset space ~
44177 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44186 arg "dialog-show character"
44194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44200 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44202 \begin_inset space ~
44205 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44218 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44223 arg "textstyle-apply"
44231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44236 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44237 Format text using the recent settings in the
44240 arg "dialog-show character"
44249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44258 arg "layout-paragraph"
44266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44272 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44292 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44306 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44320 \begin_layout Subsection
44321 View/Update Toolbar
44322 \begin_inset Index idx
44325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 Toolbar ! View / Update
44334 \begin_layout Standard
44335 \begin_inset Graphics
44336 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44343 \begin_layout Standard
44344 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44350 \begin_layout Standard
44351 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44355 \begin_layout Standard
44356 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44362 \begin_layout Standard
44363 \begin_inset Tabular
44364 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44365 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44366 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44367 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44391 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44407 arg "buffer-update"
44415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44437 arg "master-buffer-view"
44445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44453 \begin_inset space ~
44462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44471 arg "master-buffer-update"
44479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44485 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44487 \begin_inset space ~
44491 \begin_inset space ~
44500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44509 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44525 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44526 Synchronize with Output
44532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44543 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44559 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44560 View (Other Formats)
44566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44573 arg "update-others"
44577 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44592 Update (Other Formats)
44605 \begin_layout Standard
44607 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44608 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44614 \begin_layout Subsection
44618 \begin_layout Standard
44619 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44626 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44630 , the table toolbar
44631 \begin_inset Index idx
44634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44648 manual and the math macro toolbar
44649 \begin_inset Index idx
44652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44665 \begin_layout Chapter
44666 The Document Settings
44667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44669 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44674 \begin_inset Index idx
44677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44678 Document ! Settings
44686 \begin_layout Standard
44690 \begin_inset space ~
44695 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44696 is called with the menu
44698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44702 You can save your document settings as default with the
44704 Save as Document Defaults
44706 button in any dialog.
44707 This will create a template named
44711 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44712 when you create a new document without
44716 \begin_layout Standard
44721 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44722 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44725 \begin_layout Standard
44726 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44727 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44728 to find the one you are looking for.
44729 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44730 the submenus of the dialog.
44732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44736 \begin_inset space \space{}
44740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44747 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44748 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44749 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44752 \begin_layout Section
44756 \begin_layout Standard
44757 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44759 Document classes are described in section
44760 \begin_inset space ~
44764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44774 \begin_layout Standard
44778 \begin_inset space ~
44783 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44788 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44789 as a layout for a document class.
44790 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44792 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44801 \begin_layout Standard
44802 Some classes use special class options by default.
44803 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44807 and you can decide to use them or not.
44808 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44809 recommended you leave them untouched.
44814 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44815 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44820 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44822 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44828 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44829 \begin_inset Newline newline
44834 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44837 \begin_inset Newline newline
44840 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44841 distribution, see section
44846 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44848 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44861 \begin_layout Standard
44866 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44867 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44868 in the background if the child document
44869 is opened without its master.
44870 This way child documents are always compilable.
44871 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44878 \begin_inset space ~
44886 \begin_layout Standard
44887 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44898 \begin_inset Index idx
44901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44903 packages ! prettyref
44909 \begin_inset Index idx
44912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 packages ! refstyle
44919 for cross-references, see section
44920 \begin_inset space ~
44924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44926 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44933 \begin_layout Section
44937 \begin_layout Standard
44938 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
44939 Please refer to the section
44942 \begin_inset space ~
44950 \begin_inset space ~
44955 manual for details.
44958 \begin_layout Section
44962 \begin_layout Standard
44963 Modules are explained in section
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44970 reference "subsec:Modules"
44977 \begin_layout Section
44981 \begin_layout Standard
44983 \begin_inset space ~
44987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44989 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
44996 \begin_layout Section
45000 \begin_layout Standard
45001 The document font settings are described in section
45002 \begin_inset space ~
45006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45008 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45015 \begin_layout Section
45019 \begin_layout Standard
45020 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45032 \begin_inset space ~
45037 and whether it should be a
45040 \begin_inset space ~
45045 can also be specified here.
45048 \begin_layout Standard
45049 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45050 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45051 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45053 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45056 \begin_layout Standard
45059 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45062 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45063 justifies the text on screen.
45064 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45068 \begin_layout Section
45072 \begin_layout Standard
45073 This dialog is described in sections
45074 \begin_inset space ~
45078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45080 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45087 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45094 \begin_layout Section
45098 \begin_layout Standard
45099 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45100 \begin_inset space ~
45104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45106 reference "subsec:Margins"
45113 \begin_layout Section
45115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45117 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45122 \begin_inset Index idx
45125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45126 Language ! Encoding
45134 \begin_layout Standard
45135 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45136 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45137 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45139 is always encoded in utf8).
45140 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45141 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45142 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45143 -command is not known for
45144 a particular character).
45147 \begin_layout Standard
45148 If you use the option
45153 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45154 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
45155 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45157 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45158 exactly one encoding.
45159 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45162 \begin_layout Standard
45164 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45165 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45166 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45167 installation supports Unicode), choose
45168 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45169 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45170 is quite incomplete, so
45171 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45176 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45177 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45178 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45179 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45180 -commands is not used, because all
45181 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45182 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45183 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45184 , two new alternative engines
45185 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45187 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45189 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45192 \begin_inset space ~
45200 \begin_inset space ~
45208 \begin_inset space ~
45214 \begin_inset space ~
45218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45220 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45225 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45229 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45232 \begin_layout Standard
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45241 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45242 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45252 The possible settings are:
45255 \begin_layout Description
45256 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45258 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45259 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45263 \begin_inset space ~
45267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45269 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45276 \begin_layout Description
45277 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45278 format you will use.
45279 In many cases this will be
45284 \begin_inset Index idx
45287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45295 If the newer package
45300 \begin_inset Index idx
45303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45305 packages ! polyglossia
45310 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45311 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45312 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45314 this package will be used instead of
45321 \begin_layout Description
45323 \begin_inset space ~
45334 would be more appropriate.
45337 \begin_layout Description
45338 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45339 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45343 (for German texts), type in
45346 \begin_inset Newline newline
45351 usepackage{ngerman}
45354 \begin_layout Description
45355 None will not use a language package.
45356 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45359 \begin_layout Standard
45360 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45363 \begin_layout Description
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45369 \begin_inset space ~
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45380 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45386 \begin_inset Index idx
45389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45391 packages ! inputenc
45397 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45398 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45399 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45403 \begin_layout Description
45404 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45406 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45407 commands, which may result in a big
45408 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45409 -commands are needed.
45412 \begin_layout Description
45414 \begin_inset space ~
45418 \begin_inset space ~
45421 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45424 \begin_layout Description
45426 \begin_inset space ~
45430 \begin_inset space ~
45433 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45436 \begin_layout Description
45438 \begin_inset space ~
45441 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45444 \begin_layout Description
45446 \begin_inset space ~
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45453 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45454 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45457 \begin_layout Description
45459 \begin_inset space ~
45463 \begin_inset space ~
45466 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45470 \begin_layout Description
45472 \begin_inset space ~
45476 \begin_inset space ~
45479 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45480 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45483 \begin_layout Description
45485 \begin_inset space ~
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45493 \begin_inset space ~
45496 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45503 \begin_layout Description
45505 \begin_inset space ~
45509 \begin_inset space ~
45513 \begin_inset space ~
45516 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45517 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45520 \begin_layout Description
45522 \begin_inset space ~
45526 \begin_inset space ~
45529 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45530 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45531 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45532 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45533 \begin_inset space ~
45537 \begin_inset space ~
45543 \begin_layout Description
45545 \begin_inset space ~
45549 \begin_inset space ~
45552 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45553 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45554 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45556 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45557 \begin_inset space ~
45561 \begin_inset space ~
45567 \begin_layout Description
45569 \begin_inset space ~
45573 \begin_inset space ~
45576 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45579 \begin_layout Description
45581 \begin_inset space ~
45585 \begin_inset space ~
45588 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45591 \begin_layout Description
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45597 \begin_inset space ~
45600 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45603 \begin_layout Description
45605 \begin_inset space ~
45608 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45611 \begin_layout Description
45613 \begin_inset space ~
45616 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45619 \begin_layout Description
45621 \begin_inset space ~
45625 \begin_inset space ~
45628 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45631 \begin_layout Description
45633 \begin_inset space ~
45637 \begin_inset space ~
45643 \begin_layout Description
45645 \begin_inset space ~
45649 \begin_inset space ~
45652 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45655 \begin_layout Description
45657 \begin_inset space ~
45661 \begin_inset space ~
45667 \begin_layout Description
45669 \begin_inset space ~
45673 \begin_inset space ~
45676 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45682 \begin_inset Index idx
45685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 , when using this, set the document language to
45697 \begin_layout Description
45699 \begin_inset space ~
45703 \begin_inset space ~
45706 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45711 , when using this, set the document language to
45714 \begin_inset space ~
45720 \begin_layout Description
45722 \begin_inset space ~
45726 \begin_inset space ~
45729 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45735 \begin_inset Index idx
45738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45740 packages ! japanese
45745 , when using this, set the document language to
45750 \begin_layout Description
45752 \begin_inset space ~
45756 \begin_inset space ~
45759 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45764 , when using this, set the document language to
45769 \begin_layout Description
45771 \begin_inset space ~
45775 \begin_inset space ~
45778 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45783 , when using this, set the document language to
45788 \begin_layout Description
45790 \begin_inset space ~
45793 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45796 \begin_layout Description
45798 \begin_inset space ~
45802 \begin_inset space ~
45806 \begin_inset space ~
45809 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45812 \begin_layout Description
45814 \begin_inset space ~
45818 \begin_inset space ~
45822 \begin_inset space ~
45825 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45826 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45827 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45830 \begin_layout Description
45832 \begin_inset space ~
45836 \begin_inset space ~
45842 \begin_layout Description
45844 \begin_inset space ~
45848 \begin_inset space ~
45851 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45852 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45855 \begin_layout Description
45857 \begin_inset space ~
45861 \begin_inset space ~
45864 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45870 \begin_inset Index idx
45873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45880 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45883 \begin_layout Description
45885 \begin_inset space ~
45893 \begin_inset space ~
45896 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
45903 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45906 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45913 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45914 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45916 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
45919 \begin_layout Description
45921 \begin_inset space ~
45925 \begin_inset space ~
45928 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45934 \begin_inset Index idx
45937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45944 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
45947 \begin_layout Description
45949 \begin_inset space ~
45952 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45958 \begin_inset Index idx
45961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45963 packages ! inputenc
45969 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
45973 \begin_layout Description
45975 \begin_inset space ~
45979 \begin_inset space ~
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45986 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
45987 \begin_inset space ~
45993 \begin_layout Description
45995 \begin_inset space ~
45999 \begin_inset space ~
46003 \begin_inset space ~
46006 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46007 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46008 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46012 \begin_layout Description
46014 \begin_inset space ~
46018 \begin_inset space ~
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46025 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46026 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46029 \begin_layout Section
46031 \begin_inset Index idx
46034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46041 \begin_inset Index idx
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46051 \begin_inset Index idx
46054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 Color ! Shaded boxes
46061 \begin_inset Index idx
46064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46065 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46073 \begin_layout Standard
46074 Here you can alter the font color for the
46078 (default: black), for
46081 \begin_inset space ~
46086 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46090 (default: white) and for
46093 \begin_inset space ~
46103 sets the color back to the default.
46106 \begin_layout Standard
46107 Clicking any button showing
46115 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46116 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46117 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46118 later more quickly.
46121 \begin_layout Standard
46122 Note, if you change the
46125 \begin_inset space ~
46130 font color and use the option
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46138 in the document settings under
46141 \begin_inset space ~
46146 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46147 \begin_inset space ~
46151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46153 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46160 \begin_layout Standard
46161 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46167 \begin_layout Standard
46171 \begin_inset space ~
46180 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46183 \begin_inset space ~
46186 Code after a forced page break:
46189 \begin_layout Itemize
46190 For the page color:
46191 \begin_inset Newline newline
46198 pagecolor{color name}
46201 \begin_layout Itemize
46202 For the text color:
46203 \begin_inset Newline newline
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46214 You are restricted to one of
46250 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46257 \begin_inset space ~
46263 \begin_inset Newline newline
46266 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46267 names to refer to them:
46270 \begin_layout Itemize
46276 \begin_inset Newline newline
46281 page_backgroundcolor
46284 \begin_layout Itemize
46288 \begin_inset space ~
46294 \begin_inset Newline newline
46302 \begin_layout Itemize
46306 \begin_inset space ~
46312 \begin_inset Newline newline
46320 \begin_layout Itemize
46324 \begin_inset space ~
46330 \begin_inset Newline newline
46338 \begin_layout Standard
46339 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46342 \begin_inset space ~
46350 \begin_inset space ~
46358 \begin_layout Section
46362 \begin_layout Standard
46363 Here you can adjust the
46367 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46371 as described in section
46372 \begin_inset space ~
46376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46378 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46385 \begin_layout Section
46389 \begin_layout Standard
46390 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46396 \begin_inset Index idx
46399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46401 packages ! biblatex
46411 \begin_inset Index idx
46414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46426 \begin_inset Index idx
46429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46437 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46440 Sectioned bibliography
46442 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46448 \begin_inset Index idx
46451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46453 packages ! bibtopic
46463 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46464 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46468 for the generation of the bibliography.
46469 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46470 \begin_inset space ~
46474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46476 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46483 \begin_layout Section
46487 \begin_layout Standard
46488 Here you can define the
46492 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46494 \begin_inset space ~
46498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46500 reference "sec:Index"
46507 \begin_layout Section
46511 \begin_layout Standard
46512 The PDF properties are explained in section
46513 \begin_inset space ~
46517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46519 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46526 \begin_layout Section
46530 \begin_layout Standard
46531 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
46532 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46538 \begin_inset Index idx
46541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46553 \begin_inset Index idx
46556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46568 \begin_inset Index idx
46571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46583 \begin_inset Index idx
46586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46598 \begin_inset Index idx
46601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46603 packages ! mathdots
46613 \begin_inset Index idx
46616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46618 packages ! mathtools
46628 \begin_inset Index idx
46631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46643 \begin_inset Index idx
46646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46648 packages ! stackrel
46658 \begin_inset Index idx
46661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46663 packages ! stmaryrd
46673 \begin_inset Index idx
46676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46678 packages ! undertilde
46683 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46686 \begin_layout Description
46687 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46688 -errors in formulas,
46689 ensure that you have this enabled.
46692 \begin_layout Description
46693 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46694 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46695 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46699 \begin_layout Description
46700 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46703 \begin_inset space ~
46715 \begin_layout Description
46716 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46719 \begin_inset space ~
46731 \begin_layout Description
46732 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46743 \begin_layout Description
46744 mathtools is used for the math commands
46780 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46787 \begin_layout Description
46788 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46790 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46799 \begin_layout Description
46800 stackrel is used for the math command
46817 \begin_layout Description
46818 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46821 \begin_layout Description
46822 undertilde is used for the math command
46830 Accents for one Character
46839 \begin_layout Section
46841 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
46843 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
46849 \begin_layout Standard
46851 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
46852 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
46855 \begin_layout Standard
46857 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
46858 The float placement options
46859 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
46862 are described in the section
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46869 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
46871 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
46879 \begin_inset space ~
46887 \begin_layout Section
46891 \begin_layout Standard
46892 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46894 Program Code Listings
46899 \begin_inset space ~
46907 \begin_layout Section
46911 \begin_layout Standard
46912 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
46920 set to be used and set the
46925 The itemize environment is described in section
46926 \begin_inset space ~
46930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46932 reference "sec:Itemize"
46939 \begin_layout Standard
46940 You can furthermore specify a
46943 \begin_inset space ~
46948 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46949 command of the desired character.
46950 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
46957 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
46959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46963 \begin_inset space \space{}
46967 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
46977 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
46978 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
46981 \begin_layout Standard
46982 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46990 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46991 -packages in the preamble (menu
46994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46995 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46998 \begin_inset space ~
47004 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47008 usepackage{textcomp}
47011 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47015 usepackage{amssymb}
47025 \begin_layout Section
47029 \begin_layout Standard
47030 Branches are described in section
47031 \begin_inset space ~
47035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47037 reference "sec:Branches"
47044 \begin_layout Section
47046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47048 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47055 \begin_layout Standard
47056 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47059 \begin_layout Description
47061 \begin_inset space ~
47065 \begin_inset space ~
47068 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47088 View Master Document
47089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47096 Update Master Document
47097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47104 menu or the toolbar.
47105 The default is set in
47107 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47108 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47113 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47117 \begin_inset space ~
47121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47123 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47130 \begin_layout Description
47132 \begin_inset space ~
47136 \begin_inset space ~
47139 Output settings for the menu
47141 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47143 \begin_inset space ~
47149 For a detailed description see section
47151 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47156 \begin_inset space ~
47164 \begin_layout Description
47166 \begin_inset space ~
47170 \begin_inset space ~
47173 Options offers settings for the export format
47181 \begin_inset space ~
47186 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47187 \begin_inset space ~
47190 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47194 \begin_inset space ~
47199 settings are described in detail in section
47201 Math Output in XHTML
47206 \begin_inset space ~
47215 \begin_inset space ~
47219 \begin_inset space ~
47224 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47227 \begin_layout Description
47229 \begin_inset space ~
47234 Save transient properties
47236 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47237 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47238 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47242 \begin_layout Itemize
47243 the activation of change tracking
47246 \begin_layout Itemize
47247 the output of tracked changes
47250 \begin_layout Itemize
47251 the recording of the document directory path.
47254 \begin_layout Standard
47255 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47256 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47260 \begin_layout Section
47268 \begin_layout Standard
47269 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47271 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47273 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47275 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47279 \begin_layout Standard
47280 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47281 -syntax is given in section
47282 \begin_inset space ~
47286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47288 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47295 \begin_layout Chapter
47301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47303 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47308 \begin_inset Index idx
47311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47320 \begin_layout Standard
47321 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47327 It has the following submenus.
47330 \begin_layout Section
47334 \begin_layout Subsection
47338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47339 User Interface File
47340 \begin_inset Index idx
47343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47344 Customization ! of toolbars
47350 \begin_inset Index idx
47353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47354 Customization ! of menus
47362 \begin_layout Standard
47363 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47364 interface (ui) file.
47365 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47373 \begin_layout Description
47378 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47381 \begin_layout Description
47388 the menu entries in popup context menus
47391 \begin_layout Description
47396 specifies the toolbar buttons
47399 \begin_layout Standard
47400 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47401 and edit the entries.
47404 \begin_layout Standard
47405 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47417 entries must be finished with an explicit
47442 and in the case of the
47443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47455 The syntax for the entries is:
47458 \begin_layout Standard
47459 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47488 \begin_layout Standard
47490 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47493 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47494 -functions are listed in the menu
47496 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47498 \begin_inset space ~
47506 \begin_layout Standard
47507 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47513 \begin_layout Standard
47514 For example, assuming you use the menu
47516 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47519 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
47523 \begin_layout Standard
47524 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47548 \begin_layout Standard
47550 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47565 to have the sixth bookmark.
47568 \begin_layout Standard
47572 \begin_inset space ~
47577 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
47578 's toolbar buttons.
47579 The currently available icon sets are compared in
47580 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47583 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
47591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47595 \begin_layout Standard
47598 Enable tool tips in main work area
47600 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
47604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47608 \begin_layout Standard
47613 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
47614 should display in the menu
47616 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47618 \begin_inset space ~
47626 \begin_layout Subsection
47630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47634 \begin_layout Standard
47637 Restore window layouts and geometries
47640 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47641 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47645 \begin_layout Standard
47648 Restore cursor positions
47650 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47654 \begin_layout Standard
47657 Load opened files from last session
47659 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47663 \begin_layout Standard
47666 Clear all session information
47668 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47669 sessions (cursor positions, names
47670 of last opened documents, etc.).
47673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47677 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47682 \begin_inset Index idx
47685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47694 \begin_layout Standard
47697 Backup original documents when saving
47699 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47700 it was saved the last time.
47701 It is stored in the
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47710 \begin_inset space ~
47714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47716 reference "sec:Paths"
47720 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47729 The backup file has the file extension
47730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47744 \begin_layout Standard
47747 Backup documents, every
47749 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47752 \begin_layout Standard
47755 Save documents compressed by default
47757 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47758 \begin_inset space ~
47762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47764 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47769 This applies to newly created documents only.
47770 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47774 Windows & work area
47777 \begin_layout Standard
47780 Open documents in tabs
47782 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47786 \begin_layout Standard
47791 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47798 \begin_inset space ~
47802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47804 reference "sec:Paths"
47808 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47815 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47816 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47817 of \SpecialChar LyX
47819 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47820 instance is created for each file.
47823 \begin_layout Standard
47826 Single close-tab button
47828 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47838 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47839 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47840 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47844 \begin_layout Standard
47845 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47853 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47854 before the change takes effect.
47862 \begin_layout Standard
47867 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47869 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47871 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47875 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47876 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47877 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47880 \begin_layout Subsection
47882 \begin_inset Index idx
47885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47894 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47901 \begin_layout Standard
47902 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
47906 \begin_layout Standard
47907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47915 This section only deals with the fonts
47919 the \SpecialChar LyX
47921 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
47924 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47925 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47936 \begin_layout Standard
47937 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47954 (depends on the system) as its
47957 \begin_inset space ~
47973 \begin_layout Standard
47974 You can change the font size with the
47981 \begin_layout Standard
47986 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
47988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47991 points have the size of 1
47992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47996 \begin_inset space ~
48000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48002 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48007 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48012 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48013 \begin_inset space ~
48017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48019 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48026 \begin_layout Subsection
48028 \begin_inset Index idx
48031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48032 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48039 \begin_inset Index idx
48042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48051 \begin_layout Standard
48052 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48053 by choosing an item in the
48054 list and selecting the
48061 \begin_layout Standard
48062 By checking the option
48066 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48069 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48070 \begin_inset space ~
48074 \begin_inset space ~
48079 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48082 \begin_layout Subsection
48084 \begin_inset Index idx
48087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48096 \begin_layout Standard
48097 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48101 \begin_layout Standard
48106 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48107 This feature is described in section
48108 \begin_inset space ~
48112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48114 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48121 \begin_layout Standard
48122 Checking the option
48125 \begin_inset space ~
48129 \begin_inset space ~
48133 \begin_inset space ~
48138 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48141 \begin_layout Section
48143 \begin_inset Index idx
48146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48155 \begin_layout Subsection
48159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48163 \begin_layout Standard
48166 Cursor follows scrollbar
48168 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48172 \begin_layout Standard
48173 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48174 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48175 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48178 \begin_layout Standard
48181 Scroll below end of document
48183 is self-explanatory.
48186 \begin_layout Standard
48187 In \SpecialChar LyX
48188 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48195 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48197 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48198 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48201 \begin_layout Standard
48204 Sort environments alphabetically
48206 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48209 \begin_layout Standard
48212 Group environments by their category
48214 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48217 \begin_layout Standard
48222 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48237 \begin_layout Standard
48238 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48243 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48244 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48248 \begin_layout Subsection
48250 \begin_inset Index idx
48253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48260 \begin_inset Index idx
48263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48264 Settings ! Shortcuts
48272 \begin_layout Standard
48277 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48279 Several binding files are available, among them:
48282 \begin_layout Description
48283 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48286 \begin_layout Description
48287 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48299 \begin_layout Description
48300 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48311 \begin_layout Standard
48312 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48317 , and binding files for special languages.
48318 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48323 \begin_inset space \space{}
48327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48335 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48336 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48337 will try to use the appropriate binding
48341 \begin_layout Standard
48342 Some binding files, like
48346 , only have a limited scope.
48347 When looking at the end of the file
48351 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48354 \begin_layout Standard
48358 \begin_inset space ~
48362 \begin_inset space ~
48367 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48368 in the selected key binding file.
48371 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48375 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48380 \begin_inset Index idx
48383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48384 Key Bindings ! Editing
48392 \begin_layout Standard
48393 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48394 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48395 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48396 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48399 Show key-bindings containing
48402 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48403 Insert there for example as keyword
48404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48411 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48412 functions that contain
48413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48421 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48422 All \SpecialChar LyX
48423 functions are also listed in the file
48428 that you will find in the
48435 \begin_layout Standard
48436 For example, to add the shortcut
48444 , select the function and press the
48449 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48450 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48453 \begin_layout Standard
48454 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48455 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48457 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48458 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48460 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48465 \begin_layout Standard
48466 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48469 \begin_layout Standard
48470 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48472 The syntax of the entries is:
48475 \begin_layout Standard
48481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48500 \begin_layout Standard
48501 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48502 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48530 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
48531 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
48532 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
48533 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
48535 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
48539 , you needed to specify it as
48544 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
48547 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
48550 \begin_layout Subsection
48552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48554 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
48559 \begin_inset Index idx
48562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48569 \begin_inset Index idx
48572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48573 Settings ! Keyboard Map
48581 \begin_layout Standard
48582 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
48583 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
48584 provides keyboard maps.
48585 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
48586 is a Romanian one, you can enable
48589 \begin_inset space ~
48593 \begin_inset space ~
48598 and select the keyboard map file named
48605 \begin_layout Standard
48614 keyboard map and, if you use the
48618 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48621 arg "keymap-primary"
48627 arg "keymap-secondary"
48630 respectively or toggle between them with
48633 arg "keymap-toggle"
48639 \begin_layout Standard
48640 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48648 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48657 \begin_layout Standard
48658 You can also specify the mouse
48660 Wheel scrolling speed
48663 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48667 Middle mouse button pasting
48669 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48670 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48673 \begin_layout Standard
48681 \begin_inset space ~
48685 \begin_inset space ~
48690 you can select a key for zooming.
48691 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48694 \begin_layout Subsection
48698 \begin_layout Standard
48699 Input completion is described in section
48700 \begin_inset space ~
48704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48706 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48713 \begin_layout Section
48715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48722 \begin_inset Index idx
48725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48732 \begin_inset Index idx
48735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48744 \begin_layout Standard
48745 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48746 are normally determined during
48748 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48751 \begin_layout Description
48753 \begin_inset space ~
48756 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48757 's working directory.
48758 It is the default when you
48769 \begin_inset space ~
48777 \begin_layout Description
48779 \begin_inset space ~
48782 templates This directory
48783 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
48784 contains the templates that are shown
48785 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
48786 will be opened when you use the menu
48787 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
48792 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48794 \begin_inset space ~
48798 \begin_inset space ~
48806 \begin_layout Description
48808 \begin_inset space ~
48811 files This directory
48812 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
48813 will be opened when you use the
48814 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
48815 contains the example files that are listed in
48818 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
48827 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48829 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
48831 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
48837 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
48839 \begin_inset Newline newline
48843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48855 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48856 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48866 \begin_layout Description
48868 \begin_inset space ~
48872 \begin_inset Index idx
48875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48881 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48882 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48883 \begin_inset space ~
48887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48889 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48897 will be used to save the backups.
48898 \begin_inset Newline newline
48901 Backup files have the ending
48902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48912 \begin_layout Description
48914 \begin_inset space ~
48917 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
48918 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
48920 \begin_inset Newline newline
48927 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48933 You can edit this file with the program
48942 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
48943 in its preferences under
48946 \begin_inset space ~
48952 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
48957 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
48959 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
48960 in your \SpecialChar LyX
48966 and \SpecialChar LyX
48967 need to be running the same time.
48968 \begin_inset Newline newline
48971 The pipe is also used for the
48975 feature, see section
48976 \begin_inset space ~
48980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48982 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48987 \begin_inset Newline newline
48990 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
48991 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
48992 \begin_inset Newline newline
49008 \begin_layout Description
49010 \begin_inset space ~
49013 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49016 \begin_layout Description
49018 \begin_inset space ~
49021 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49022 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49023 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49026 \begin_layout Description
49028 \begin_inset space ~
49031 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49037 You only need to specify it if you are using
49041 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49043 For \SpecialChar LyX
49048 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49052 \begin_layout Description
49054 \begin_inset space ~
49057 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49058 When \SpecialChar LyX
49059 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49060 to find it on the system.
49061 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49063 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49072 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49073 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49076 \begin_layout Description
49078 \begin_inset space ~
49081 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49082 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49083 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49084 code or in the document
49086 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49088 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49089 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49090 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49091 scanned for the input files.
49092 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49093 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49095 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49096 compilation may fail for some documents.
49099 \begin_layout Section
49103 \begin_layout Standard
49104 Here you can insert your
49113 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49115 \begin_inset space ~
49119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49121 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49125 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49128 \begin_layout Section
49130 \begin_inset Index idx
49133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49134 Language ! Settings
49140 \begin_inset Index idx
49143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49144 Settings ! Language
49152 \begin_layout Subsection
49154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49156 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49163 \begin_layout Description
49165 \begin_inset space ~
49169 \begin_inset space ~
49172 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49174 You can find its actual translation status here:
49175 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49177 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49185 \begin_layout Description
49187 \begin_inset space ~
49190 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49191 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49192 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49193 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49210 The most widespread language package is
49215 \begin_inset Index idx
49218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49225 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49227 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49228 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49229 come with the alternative
49235 \begin_inset Index idx
49238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49240 packages ! polyglossia
49245 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49246 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49252 The available selections are described in section
49253 \begin_inset space ~
49257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49259 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49266 \begin_layout Description
49268 \begin_inset space ~
49271 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49272 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49273 you can here specify the command to start the package.
49274 An example is the start command
49280 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49282 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49286 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49302 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49307 \begin_layout Description
49309 \begin_inset space ~
49317 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49318 command toggles the package on and off.
49321 \begin_layout Description
49323 \begin_inset space ~
49327 \begin_inset space ~
49330 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49334 \begin_layout Description
49336 \begin_inset space ~
49340 \begin_inset space ~
49343 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49347 \begin_layout Description
49349 \begin_inset space ~
49353 \begin_inset space ~
49356 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49357 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49358 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49360 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49367 \begin_layout Description
49369 \begin_inset space ~
49372 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49374 When this option is not set, the
49377 \begin_inset space ~
49382 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49384 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49387 \begin_inset space ~
49395 \begin_layout Description
49397 \begin_inset space ~
49403 \begin_inset space ~
49409 When it is not set, the
49412 \begin_inset space ~
49417 is set to the end of the document.
49420 \begin_layout Description
49422 \begin_inset space ~
49426 \begin_inset space ~
49429 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49430 language will be underlined in blue.
49433 \begin_layout Description
49435 \begin_inset space ~
49439 \begin_inset space ~
49442 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49443 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49446 \begin_layout Description
49448 \begin_inset space ~
49451 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49452 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
49453 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
49454 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
49457 \begin_layout Subsection
49461 \begin_layout Standard
49462 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
49463 \begin_inset space ~
49467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49469 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
49476 \begin_layout Section
49480 \begin_layout Subsection
49482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49484 name "subsec:General-output"
49491 \begin_layout Description
49493 \begin_inset space ~
49496 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49498 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49500 \begin_inset space ~
49506 For a detailed description see section
49508 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49513 \begin_inset space ~
49521 \begin_layout Description
49523 \begin_inset space ~
49526 Options Options for the program
49530 that is used for the export format
49535 \begin_inset space ~
49539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49541 reference "subsec:Export"
49546 Possible options are listed in the
49551 \begin_inset Newline newline
49555 \begin_inset Flex URL
49558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49560 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
49570 \begin_layout Description
49572 \begin_inset space ~
49576 \begin_inset space ~
49579 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
49582 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49583 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
49585 \begin_inset space ~
49591 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
49594 \begin_layout Description
49596 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
49598 \begin_inset space ~
49602 \begin_inset Index idx
49605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49612 \begin_inset Index idx
49615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49616 Settings ! Date format
49621 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
49622 \begin_inset Newline newline
49626 \begin_inset Flex URL
49629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49631 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
49637 \begin_inset Newline newline
49640 For example the format
49641 \begin_inset Newline newline
49645 \begin_inset Newline newline
49648 prints the date as day/month/year.
49653 \begin_layout Description
49655 \begin_inset space ~
49659 \begin_inset space ~
49662 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49663 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49666 \begin_layout Subsection
49672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49674 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49679 \begin_inset Index idx
49682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49683 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49692 \begin_layout Description
49694 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49696 \begin_inset space ~
49704 \begin_inset space ~
49708 \begin_inset space ~
49711 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49716 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49737 are used for Cyrillic.
49738 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49751 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49753 sets up in the background.
49754 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49759 \begin_layout Description
49761 \begin_inset space ~
49765 \begin_inset space ~
49769 \begin_inset space ~
49773 \begin_inset space ~
49776 options They only have an effect when the program
49780 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49783 \begin_layout Standard
49784 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49785 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49786 manuals of the applications.
49789 \begin_layout Description
49791 \begin_inset space ~
49794 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49795 \begin_inset space ~
49799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49801 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49808 \begin_layout Description
49810 \begin_inset space ~
49813 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49814 \begin_inset space ~
49818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49820 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49827 \begin_layout Description
49829 \begin_inset space ~
49832 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49833 \begin_inset space ~
49837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49839 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49846 \begin_layout Description
49852 \begin_inset space ~
49855 command Command for the program
49857 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49860 that is described in the section
49862 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49867 Additional Features
49872 \begin_layout Standard
49873 There are additionally the following options:
49876 \begin_layout Description
49878 \begin_inset space ~
49882 \begin_inset space ~
49886 \begin_inset space ~
49890 \begin_inset space ~
49895 \begin_inset space ~
49898 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
49899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49916 to separate folders.
49917 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
49919 \begin_inset Index idx
49922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49929 \begin_inset Index idx
49932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49941 \begin_layout Description
49943 \begin_inset space ~
49947 \begin_inset space ~
49951 \begin_inset space ~
49955 \begin_inset space ~
49959 \begin_inset space ~
49963 \begin_inset space ~
49966 changes Removes all manually set
49972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49973 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49975 \begin_inset space ~
49980 dialog when changing the document class.
49983 \begin_layout Section
49985 \begin_inset space ~
49989 \begin_inset Index idx
49992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50001 \begin_layout Subsection
50003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50005 name "subsec:Converters"
50010 \begin_inset Index idx
50013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50022 \begin_layout Standard
50023 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
50024 from one format to another.
50025 You can modify converters or create new ones.
50026 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
50033 \begin_inset space ~
50038 field and press the
50043 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
50047 \begin_inset space ~
50052 drop-down list, modify the
50056 field and press the
50063 \begin_layout Standard
50066 Converter File Cache
50072 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
50074 Maximum Age (in days
50077 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
50078 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
50081 \begin_layout Standard
50082 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
50083 definition, is described in the section
50094 \begin_layout Subsection
50096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50098 name "sec:File-Formats"
50103 \begin_inset Index idx
50106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50113 \begin_inset Index idx
50116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50125 \begin_layout Standard
50126 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
50136 programs that should be used for certain formats.
50139 \begin_layout Standard
50140 You can also define the
50142 Default output format
50144 that is used when you use
50146 View, Update, View Master Document
50150 Update Master Document
50156 menu or the toolbar.
50159 \begin_layout Standard
50160 More about formats and their options is described in the section
50171 \begin_layout Standard
50172 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
50174 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
50175 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
50176 This is done by specifying a
50181 More about this is described in the section
50192 \begin_layout Chapter
50193 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50195 \begin_inset Index idx
50198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50207 name "chap:Units-available-in"
50214 \begin_layout Standard
50216 \begin_inset space ~
50220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50222 reference "tab:Units"
50226 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50227 and used in this documentation.
50230 \begin_layout Standard
50231 \begin_inset Float table
50238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50239 \begin_inset Caption Standard
50241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50257 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50265 \begin_inset Tabular
50266 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
50267 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
50268 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50269 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
50270 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50423 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50694 scaled point (65536
50695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50762 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50886 % of original image width
50891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50975 \begin_layout Standard
50976 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50979 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
50986 \begin_layout Bibliography
50987 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50988 LatexCommand bibitem
50995 The \SpecialChar LyX
50997 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51000 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
51006 \begin_inset Newline newline
51010 \begin_inset Flex URL
51013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51015 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
51023 \begin_layout Bibliography
51024 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51025 LatexCommand bibitem
51026 key "latexcompanion"
51031 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
51033 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51034 Companion Second Edition.
51037 Addison-Wesley, 2004
51040 \begin_layout Bibliography
51041 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51042 LatexCommand bibitem
51048 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
51051 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
51055 Addison-Wesley, 2003
51058 \begin_layout Bibliography
51059 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51060 LatexCommand bibitem
51069 : A Document Preparation System.
51072 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
51075 \begin_layout Bibliography
51076 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51077 LatexCommand bibitem
51087 The \SpecialChar TeX
51091 Addison-Wesley, 1984
51094 \begin_layout Bibliography
51095 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51096 LatexCommand bibitem
51102 The \SpecialChar TeX
51104 \begin_inset Newline newline
51108 \begin_inset Flex URL
51111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51113 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
51121 \begin_layout Bibliography
51122 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51123 LatexCommand bibitem
51129 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51131 \begin_inset Newline newline
51135 \begin_inset Flex URL
51138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51140 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
51148 \begin_layout Bibliography
51149 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51150 LatexCommand bibitem
51157 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51159 name "Documentation"
51160 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
51167 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51171 \begin_inset Newline newline
51175 \begin_inset Flex URL
51178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51180 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
51188 \begin_layout Bibliography
51189 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51190 LatexCommand bibitem
51197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51199 name "Documentation"
51200 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
51205 how to use the program
51207 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51211 \begin_inset Newline newline
51215 \begin_inset Flex URL
51218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51220 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
51228 \begin_layout Bibliography
51229 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51230 LatexCommand bibitem
51237 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51239 name "Documentation"
51240 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
51245 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51251 \begin_inset Index idx
51254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51256 packages ! biblatex
51262 \begin_inset Newline newline
51266 \begin_inset Flex URL
51269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51271 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
51279 \begin_layout Bibliography
51280 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51281 LatexCommand bibitem
51288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51290 name "Documentation"
51291 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
51296 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51302 \begin_inset Index idx
51305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51313 \begin_inset Newline newline
51317 \begin_inset Flex URL
51320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51322 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51330 \begin_layout Bibliography
51331 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51332 LatexCommand bibitem
51339 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51341 name "Documentation"
51342 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51352 \begin_inset Newline newline
51356 \begin_inset Flex URL
51359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51361 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51369 \begin_layout Bibliography
51370 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51371 LatexCommand bibitem
51372 key "makeindex-man"
51378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51381 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51391 \begin_inset Newline newline
51395 \begin_inset Flex URL
51398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51400 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51408 \begin_layout Bibliography
51409 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51410 LatexCommand bibitem
51417 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51419 name "Documentation"
51420 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51430 \begin_inset Newline newline
51434 \begin_inset Flex URL
51437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51439 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51447 \begin_layout Bibliography
51448 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51449 LatexCommand bibitem
51456 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51458 name "Documentation"
51459 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
51464 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
51466 \begin_inset Newline newline
51470 \begin_inset Flex URL
51473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51475 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
51483 \begin_layout Bibliography
51484 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51485 LatexCommand bibitem
51492 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51494 name "Documentation"
51495 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51500 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51506 \begin_inset Index idx
51509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51517 \begin_inset Newline newline
51521 \begin_inset Flex URL
51524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51526 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
51534 \begin_layout Bibliography
51535 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51536 LatexCommand bibitem
51543 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51545 name "Documentation"
51546 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
51551 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51557 \begin_inset Index idx
51560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51562 packages ! enumitem
51568 \begin_inset Newline newline
51572 \begin_inset Flex URL
51575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51577 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
51585 \begin_layout Bibliography
51586 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51587 LatexCommand bibitem
51594 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51596 name "Documentation"
51597 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
51602 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51608 \begin_inset Index idx
51611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51613 packages ! fancyhdr
51619 \begin_inset Newline newline
51623 \begin_inset Flex URL
51626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51628 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
51636 \begin_layout Bibliography
51637 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51638 LatexCommand bibitem
51645 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51647 name "Documentation"
51648 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51653 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51659 \begin_inset Index idx
51662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51664 packages ! hyperref
51670 \begin_inset Newline newline
51674 \begin_inset Flex URL
51677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51679 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51687 \begin_layout Bibliography
51688 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51689 LatexCommand bibitem
51696 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51698 name "Documentation"
51699 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51704 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51710 \begin_inset Index idx
51713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51715 packages ! microtpye
51721 \begin_inset Newline newline
51725 \begin_inset Flex URL
51728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51730 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51738 \begin_layout Bibliography
51739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51740 LatexCommand bibitem
51747 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51749 name "Documentation"
51750 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51755 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51761 \begin_inset Index idx
51764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51772 \begin_inset Newline newline
51776 \begin_inset Flex URL
51779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51781 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51789 \begin_layout Bibliography
51790 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51791 LatexCommand bibitem
51798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51800 name "Documentation"
51801 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51806 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51812 \begin_inset Index idx
51815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51817 packages ! prettyref
51823 \begin_inset Newline newline
51827 \begin_inset Flex URL
51830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51832 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51840 \begin_layout Bibliography
51841 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51842 LatexCommand bibitem
51849 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51851 name "Documentation"
51852 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51857 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51863 \begin_inset Index idx
51866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51868 packages ! refstyle
51874 \begin_inset Newline newline
51878 \begin_inset Flex URL
51881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51883 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51891 \begin_layout Bibliography
51892 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51893 LatexCommand bibitem
51900 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51903 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
51908 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51910 \begin_inset Newline newline
51914 \begin_inset Flex URL
51917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51919 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
51927 \begin_layout Bibliography
51928 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51929 LatexCommand bibitem
51936 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51939 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
51944 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51946 \begin_inset Newline newline
51950 \begin_inset Flex URL
51953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51955 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
51963 \begin_layout Bibliography
51964 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51965 LatexCommand bibitem
51972 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51975 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
51980 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51981 for Cyrillic languages:
51982 \begin_inset Newline newline
51986 \begin_inset Flex URL
51989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51991 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
51999 \begin_layout Bibliography
52000 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52001 LatexCommand bibitem
52008 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52011 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
52016 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52018 \begin_inset Newline newline
52022 \begin_inset Flex URL
52025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52027 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
52035 \begin_layout Bibliography
52036 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52037 LatexCommand bibitem
52044 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52047 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
52052 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52054 \begin_inset Newline newline
52058 \begin_inset Flex URL
52061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52063 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
52071 \begin_layout Bibliography
52072 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52073 LatexCommand bibitem
52080 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52083 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
52088 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52090 \begin_inset Newline newline
52094 \begin_inset Flex URL
52097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52099 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
52107 \begin_layout Standard
52108 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52142 \begin_inset Note Note
52145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52152 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
52153 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
52154 bibliography is the second one:
52162 \begin_layout Standard
52163 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
52164 LatexCommand bibtex
52165 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
52166 options "biblio/alphadin"
52173 \begin_layout Standard
52174 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52178 \begin_layout Standard
52182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52188 pagedeclaration}[1]{
52191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52197 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
52205 \begin_inset Note Note
52208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52209 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
52210 \begin_inset space ~
52214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52216 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
52228 \begin_layout Standard
52229 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
52230 LatexCommand printnomenclature
52236 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
52237 LatexCommand printindex